SCHEDULING | CHAPTER 14

Chapter 14
Scheduling

The Scheduling functionality takes factors that affect production within your manufacturing center – quantity, setup time,
production time, resource capacity, and so on – to calculate how long it takes each job to complete. It then displays this
schedule within the Job Scheduling Board, the Resource Scheduling Board, and the Multi-Resource Scheduling Board. Use
these visual tools to both review and fine-tune when jobs start and end.

To help you make solid scheduling decisions, the module has a key tool – What If Scheduling. This calculation tool gives you
a preview of how the schedule may or may not work. If you like the what-if schedule displayed on the scheduling boards,
you can accept it. The what-if schedule is then included in your manufacturing center’s actual schedule.

Reports in the application can also help you evaluate the manufacturing schedule. The Shop Load Report prints out the load
hours for operations scheduled within each resource group. Use the Priority Dispatch Report to review the work scheduled at
each resource group – according to the job schedule and the work that has already been finished on the job. Use the
Schedule Impact Report to analyze the effect of the what-if schedule on the actual schedule.

The Overload Informer is another important scheduling tool. Use it to discover which resources have too much work assigned
to them within both the actual and what-if schedules. By pinpointing where potential bottlenecks may occur, you can then
decide on how to best schedule the jobs to prevent overloading.

The information contained within this chapter is intended as an overview of the scheduling functionality. If you wish to learn
more about how the scheduling engine calculates its results, review the Scheduling Technical Reference Guide available
within application help. This guide is located under the Working With section within the Scheduling module help topics.

SCHEDULING | CHAPTER 10

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 377

CHAPTER 14 | SCHEDULING

Scheduling Concepts
The Scheduling module can help you prevent potential problems and more accurately predict when jobs complete – ensuring that your
job production runs both smoothly and efficiently.

This module evaluates the schedule based on the principle of supply and demand. It does this by calculating the load on all resources
(machines, employees) the job uses. The load is the hours needed to start and finish each operation, so load during a specific time
period equals the demand on the resource. For example, an operation takes one hour to set up the machine and five hours to produce
the production quantity. This means that this operation requires six hours of load (demand) on the resource, and this time is placed on
the schedule.

Capacity defines the supply of a resource. It measures either how much time is available on the resource or the number of units that
can be produced. A resource can either have finite (limited) or infinite (unlimited) capacity. Regardless of how capacity is measured by
the resource, however, capacity cannot be stored - if it is not used during the schedule, this value disappears.

Scheduling Times

The scheduling functionality considers several factors when calculating how long it takes to complete a job’s production quantity.

• Queue Time is the length of time a job waits at a resource before setup work is performed on the job.

• Setup Time defines how long it takes a resource to prepare the operation for the job.

• Production Time indicates how much time is needed to produce the part quantity.

• Move Time is the length of time it takes to transport the part quantity to the next resource.

• Production Preparation Time is the time added to the lead time of the manufactured item to determine the start date.

• Kit Time is the number of days required to assemble the materials for a manufactured part before the job starts.

• Receive Time is the number of days subtracted from the PO Release Due Date to account for unpacking and inspecting the
purchased items. On job suggestions or unfirm jobs, this value can also indicate how many days from the Required By Date it
takes to move the manufactured items to the next job.

Scheduling Horizons

The Epicor application uses three distinct calculations to determine how much load to schedule against your upcoming jobs. Each
scheduling calculation is run against jobs whose Start Dates fall within a horizon calendar range. You specify how many days are
included within each horizon calendar range, so you can set up the scheduling engine to generate results that best match your
production planning needs.

The following graph illustrates these calculations and their different horizons.

Finite Scheduling

Finite Scheduling calculates the most detailed scheduling results. When the scheduling engines determines the load to place against
these jobs, it takes into account the existing resource load (capacity) for each operation on the job method. Resources cannot be
scheduled above their available capacity per day, so resources cannot be overloaded in this section of the schedule. Any jobs with Start
Dates that occur on or before the Finite Horizon are finitely scheduled.

For example, if the Finite Horizon is 30 days and the Scheduled Start Date for the scheduling process is March 1, all jobs with Start
Dates from March 1- March 30 are finitely scheduled.

378 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SCHEDULING | CHAPTER 14

Infinite Scheduling

Infinite Scheduling calculates less detailed results by ignoring existing resource load (capacity). Job operations are scheduled without
constraints against each resource. You use this calculation because at some point in the future schedule, you do not care your
resources are overloaded. You can then manage the overload by either shifting load or increasing capacity. Shop load records are
created to provide the overload visibility.

For example, if the MRP process calculates you need 500 parts one week from today, it schedules them all to be built at the same
time, even though you can only do 100 at a time. If the Finite Horizon is 30 days and the Scheduled Start Date for the scheduling
process is March 1, all jobs with Start Dates on March 31 and later are infinitely scheduled.

Rough Cut Scheduling

Rough Cut Scheduling ignores resource and shop load records normally included in other scheduling calculations. Instead, this
calculation schedules every job using the Need By Dates, Operation Production Standards, and the Rough Cut Parameters (by
operation) to calculate the start dates. These jobs are infinitely scheduled, but the load is not placed against these resources. This
reduces the processing time needed to generate the overall schedule. Rough Cut Scheduling also gives you a general idea of the
production plan required in the future.
To learn more about resource groups, review
For example, if the Rough Cut Horizon is 90 days and the Scheduled Start Date for the Resource Groups sections within
the scheduling process is March 1, all jobs with Start Dates on or after May 29 are Chapter 11: Engineering.
rough cut scheduled.

Operations
This section describes the operations available in the Scheduling module. Each operation is described as a workflow to help guide you
through the process from start to finish. These programs are primarily found within the General Operations folder for this module. If a
unique setup record is required to run the operation, this record is also described in this section.

Scheduling Features
A job is first scheduled within Job Entry. Besides indicating when the job starts and ends, you can define additional parameters that
affect how each job is placed on the Job Scheduling Board, the Resource Scheduling Board, and the Multi-Resource Scheduling Board.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Job Management > General Operations > Job Entry

1. To launch this command, click

the Actions menu; select the
Schedule submenu and then
select Job Scheduling.
The Schedule Job window
has some key features you 1
can define:

This command is only

available if the job is
engineered. To learn more
about how to run this
functionality, review the
Scheduling the Job section
in Chapter 12:
Job Management.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 379

CHAPTER 14 | SCHEDULING

2. Forward Scheduling
indicates this job is scheduled
using a Start Date and Start
Time. Based on this date and 4
time, the job’s operations are
5
evaluated by the scheduling
process. The times for each 6
operation, minus any
7
overlapping operations, are
used to calculate the final
2 3
date on when this job
completes.

3. Backward Scheduling indicates this job is scheduled using a Due Date and Due Time. Based on this date and time, the job’s
part method is evaluated by the scheduling process. The times for each operation, minus any overlapping operations, are used to
calculate the date on which this job needs to begin.

4. When a material is constrained, the scheduling functionality determines when a material is available for an operation. It then
uses this date as the operation’s Start Date. In some situations, however, you may wish to ignore these material constraints. To
do this, select the Override Material Constraints check box.

5. Parts are manufactured through operations that run on a group of related resources. Scheduling is calculated through the values
defined on each specific resource, which can be either a machine or an employee. If a resource is defined as Finite, it means that
it is constrained to run for a specific number of hours each day and that the operations cannot be scheduled beyond this hour
limit – or Capacity. When you select the Finite Capacity check box, all resources defined as finite are scheduled with this
constrained capacity. Any resources not defined as finite, however, are scheduled using Infinite Capacity.

If you do not select this option, the scheduling functionality assumes that all resources on this job have infinite capacity which
means there is no limit to the number of operations that can be scheduled within these resources. You have pros and cons for
both infinite and finite scheduling. Finite Scheduling does not allow overloaded resources, but it can cause your jobs to miss their
Required By Dates. Infinite scheduling is useful for locating bottlenecks on specific resources, but more manual work is required to
resolve scheduling issues.

6. Use the What-If Schedule feature to test a schedule by first creating a temporary schedule and then reviewing this schedule’s
impact. On the scheduling boards, these hours are displayed as what if times, and you can view them independently from your
current times. When you decide that the temporary schedule is acceptable, you remove the job schedule’s What If status by
accepting the changes on a scheduling board. This job time is then incorporated into the current schedule.

7. Use the Recalculate Expected Yield feature to recalculate expected production yield for a job. You need to have already
selected the Production Yield check box on the Job Entry > Header sheet and at least one production yield recalculation
system action on the Operation master for every operation used on this job.

Global Scheduling Process

The Global Scheduling process is divided into three components. Run these components in the following order to globally schedule
your jobs:

1. Calculate Global Scheduling Order If you want the Calculate Global Scheduling Order
and the Global Scheduling processes to run
2. Adjust Global Scheduling Order (optional) automatically, you can assign them both to a Process
Set. Make sure the Calculate Global Scheduling
3. Global Scheduling Order process is run before the Global Scheduling
process. For more information on how to do this,
SCHEDULING | CHAPTER 10
review the Automatic Data Processing chapter in the
Epicor ERP Implementation Guide.

380 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SCHEDULING | CHAPTER 14

Calculate Global Scheduling Order Process

Run the Calculate Global Scheduling Order process before you run the Global Scheduling process.

This process causes the scheduling engine to find each job’s best End Date. The engine can then compare the End Date to the
Requested By Date to determine if the job is early or late. This Early Days or Late Days is multiplied with the job’s Priority code to
determine a scheduling order sequence.

Run this program to define how many process runs, or processors, are used by the scheduling engine. Increasing the number of
processors reduces the strain on the network while the scheduling engine runs - other processes can run between each processor.
Note, however, that your server must have the capacity to run multiple processes.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Scheduling > General Operations > Calculate Global Scheduling Order

Available options:

1. In the Schedule Start Date and

Schedule Start Time fields, enter the
date and time the process uses to
begin the forward schedule.

2. In the Log File field, enter the name of

the file you want to use for saving the
log information.
5
3. The Log Level field defines the type of
tracking you want from the process. 1
Options include a basic log, a log with
2
process details, or logs for both process
and scheduling details. 3
4. In the Number of Processors field, 4
enter the number of processes that are
started on the server to complete
scheduling. You can improve
scheduling performance by splitting
one large process into smaller, multiple
processes. If your server has the
capacity to handle multiple processes,
enter an appropriate number in this
field.

Before you enter a value higher than

one, however, you should verify with
your Epicor consultant whether your
server has enough capacity to handle
multiple processes. Your Epicor
consultant can also help determine the
value to enter in this field.

5. When you finish, click the Submit button.

The process runs and the jobs are assigned a job priority sequence. You can change this sequence using the Adjust Global Scheduling
Order process. The sequence adjustments you make through this program are then used by the Global Scheduling process to calculate
the job schedule.

Adjust Global Scheduling Order

Use Adjust Global Scheduling Order to review and fine-tune the scheduling priorities that were generated by the Calculate Global
Scheduling Order process. The Priority value is defined on specific jobs to indicate scheduling precedence.

You can manually change the sequence in which these jobs are scheduled or schedule a sub-set of the original list. For example, you
could choose to schedule all jobs for a specific Project ID. The Adjust Global Scheduling Order is an optional step in the Global
Scheduling process.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Scheduling > General Operations > Adjust Global Scheduling Order

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 381

CHAPTER 14 | SCHEDULING

To adjust global scheduling order:

1. Click Search on the Standard toolbar

to find and select jobs currently in 3
production. When you return to
the Adjust Global Scheduling Order
window, these jobs display.
2 1
2. Change the Schedule Sequence field
to adjust the priority scheduling
sequence.

3. When you finish, click Save .

Global Scheduling

Use the Global Scheduling process to schedule the list of jobs generated by the Calculate Global Scheduling Order process and
optionally fine-tuned by the Adjust Global Scheduling Order. All the jobs selected are placed within the schedule, either on the actual
schedule or on a What-If schedule.

You can select to process using either finite or infinite capacity. If you use finite capacity, work cannot be scheduled if it is greater than
a resource’s available capacity. If you use infinite capacity, work can be scheduled above the resource’s available capacity in order to
overload it; this helps identify bottlenecks in the schedule.

You typically use Global Scheduling to schedule your jobs as you can set up this process to run on a recurring schedule. Job schedules
then update regularly based on current information.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Scheduling > General Operations > Global Scheduling

1. In the Schedule Start Date field,

enter the first date that you use to
globally schedule your jobs.

2. In the Schedule Start Time field,

enter the time that you use to globally 8
schedule your jobs.

3. In the Log File field, enter the name of

1
the file you want to use for saving the
Scheduling log information. 2

4. The Log Level field defines the type of 3

tracking you want from the Scheduling 4
process. Options include a basic log, a
log with process details, or logs for 5
both process and scheduling details. 6
5. If you only want this process to 7
reschedule what-if jobs, select the
What-If Schedule Only check box.
Your actual schedule is not changed. You are able to review the What-If schedule and accept, discard, or save the changes using
the Job Scheduling Board, Resource Scheduling Board, or Multi-Resource Scheduling Board.

6. Select the Finite Load check box to process and schedule finite resources.

7. In the Number of Schedulers field, enter the number of scheduling processes started on the server to complete scheduling. You
can improve scheduling performance by splitting one large process into smaller, multiple processes. If your server has the capacity
to handle multiple scheduling processes, enter an appropriate number in this field.

Before you enter a value higher than one, however, you should verify with your Epicor consultant whether your server has
enough capacity to handle multiple processes. Your Epicor consultant can also help determine the value to enter in this field.

8. When you finish, click the Submit button.

All the jobs that match your parameters are rescheduled. When the process is complete, you can view the changes on the Job
Scheduling Board, Resource Scheduling Board, or Multi-Resource Scheduling Board.

382 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SCHEDULING | CHAPTER 14

Scheduling Parameters
You use scheduling parameters to determine the point at which the scheduling engine places load on the schedule. This section
discusses Finite Horizon, Overload Horizon, and Rough Cut Horizon. For more information about the Auto Firm Horizon and the
Unfirm Series Horizon ranges, review Chapter 13: Material Requirements Planning.

Plant Maintenance

Set the scheduling parameters in Plant Maintenance.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Job Management > Setup > Plant

1. Click the Plant button to find and

select the plant you need.

2. Use the Scheduling Send Ahead For

drop-down list to determine if the
start-to-start job operation offset will
be used for production or setup time.
If you chose setup, a secondary
operation with a start-to-start
relationship will schedule setup to
begin xxx minutes (defined in the
operation) after the production starts 1
on the primary operation. If you select
production, the production time of
the secondary operation will be 4
scheduled to start xxx minutes after 5
the production starts on the primary
2
operation.
3
3. Select the Override Scheduling
Constraints check box to indicate
you can move jobs on scheduling
boards as you need. Typically when
you try to move a job or an operation
that has quantities for material
constraints or subcontract POs, you
receive an error. However if you select this check box, you can move any jobs created in this plant to different areas on the
scheduling boards, ignoring both material and subcontract PO quantities.

4. In the Finite Horizon field, enter the future point of time (in days) at which the scheduling engine will stop using finite capacity
and begin using infinite capacity against resource groups. This number of days is added to the current system date to determine
the last day on which finite capacity is used. After this date, the scheduling engine uses infinite capacity to calculate the
schedule.

The Finite Horizon is useful in providing a long-term production view without committing resources to the schedule. It also
reduces processing time for the scheduling engine. As the schedule moves toward these infinitely scheduled jobs, the scheduling
engine can be run again to more accurately reflect how much actual production time is required, as these jobs now fall within
the finite horizon range.

5. In the Overload Horizon field, enter the future point of time (in days) at which resource capacity is calculated against the
demand that falls within this date range. A tracker program, the Overload Informer, then displays the capacity used on each
resource per each day, indicating when a resource is below capacity (such as 72%), at capacity (100%), and above capacity (such
as 117%). Only resources scheduled with infinite capacity display on this tracker.

You use the Overload Horizon to discover where bottlenecks may occur in the upcoming schedule. You can then adjust your
short-term scheduling needs to correct these bottlenecks. Any demands placed on resources outside of this Overload Horizon
date range are not included in this calculation.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 383

CHAPTER 14 | SCHEDULING

6. In the Rough Cut Horizon field,

enter the future point of time (in
days) after which the Rough Cut
Scheduling formula is used to 7
schedule jobs. Any jobs that fall
within this date range are scheduled
using the demand requirements and
supply capacity defined for each
resource and resource group. The
resulting values represent the actual
schedule planned for your
manufacturing center to both start
and finish the operations and gather 6
the materials required to complete
each job.

Any jobs that fall outside of the Rough Cut Horizon date range, however, use the rough cut formula to generate the schedule.
This formula uses the Need By Dates and Lead Time values on each material and operation to calculate how much time is
required for each job to finish its operations and gather its materials. The rough cut scheduling formula infinitely schedules these
future jobs. This data, or load, is not recorded against your resources, which reduces the processing time needed to generate the
overall schedule. Rough cut scheduling also gives you a general idea of the production plan you may require in the future.

7. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Save Resource Load

Use the Save Resource Load process to assign load to resources on the rough cut scheduled jobs. All rough cut jobs that have Required
By Dates within the specified date range is recalculated. The load required to produce these jobs is allocated against resources, and the
information is saved within the schedule.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Scheduling > General Operations > Save Resource Load

1. In the Start Date and End Date fields,

enter the date range. Any rough cut
jobs that have Required By Dates
within this range are rescheduled with
their load.
4
2. Use the Edit list of Jobs check box if
you want to view and edit the list.

3. In the Number of Processors field,

enter the number of processes that are 1
started on the server to complete
scheduling the resource load. You can 2
improve scheduling performance by 3
splitting one large process into smaller,
multiple processes. If your server has
the capacity to handle multiple
scheduling processes, enter an
appropriate number in this field.

Before you enter a value higher than

one, however, you should verify with
your Epicor consultant whether your
server has enough capacity to handle multiple processes. Your consultant can also help determine the value to enter in this field.

4. When you finish, click Submit on the Standard toolbar.

These jobs are available for display on the Shop Load report and the Overload Because Save Resource Load is a process, you can
Informer. also set up this program run through an automatic
recurring schedule. To learn how to do this, review
the Automatic Data Processing chapter in the
Epicor ERP Implementation Guide.

384 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SCHEDULING | CHAPTER 14

Job Scheduling Board

Use the Job Scheduling Board to review and change the schedules for one or multiple jobs. Through this program, you can visually see
all the jobs currently scheduled at your company. You can then make adjustments to them, controlling when each job should both
start and end.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Scheduling > General Operations > Job Scheduling Board

To select the jobs you want to display on the Selection sheet:

1. If you want to view multiple jobs, click

the Job button to find and select the
jobs you wish to view.
1 2 3 4
2. To display a specific job, enter its
number within the Job field, and press
the Tab key on your keyboard.

3. To review multiple projects, click the

Project button to find and select the
projects you wish to display and press
the Enter key on your keyboard. The jobs created for the specific project display on the board.

4. You can also display all the jobs created for a specific project. To do this, enter the project’s identifier within the Project field.

When you finish selecting the jobs, to review their schedules.

Job Scheduling Board – Schedule

The Schedule sheet is a key sheet within this program. Use this sheet to visually review how long it takes to start and complete each
job. If you need, you can adjust a specific job’s schedule so that it fits better in the overall schedule.

Available features:
5 6
1. Job List – Use this list to review the
primary information on each job. The
Job Number, Part, Customer
ID, Due Date, Start Date, and 1 3 4
Days Late values display on this
grid.

2. Schedule Display Area – This panel

displays the schedules of each selected
job through a visual interface.
Depending on the job’s status, a
different color bar appears for the job’s
scheduled duration. 2
These color bars can be modified
using personalization options. These
options are explored in the Job
Scheduling Board - User Preferences
section later in this chapter.

3. To move backwards through the

calendar, click the Left Arrow button.

4. To move forwards through the

calendar, click the Right Arrow
button.

5. You can jump to a specific point within the calendar by using the Goto field. To do this, click the Down Arrow, and select a
different date from the calendar.

6. Use the Sort By field to change how the jobs are organized on the Schedule panel. You can sort jobs by Start Date, Job, Part,
Customer ID, Due Date, and Days Late.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 385

CHAPTER 14 | SCHEDULING

Job Scheduling Board – Context Menu

The Job List grid on the Schedule sheet also contains a context menu you use to quickly launch selected job records inside key
programs; you can also use it to launch important functionality. To view the context menu, select a job from the list, and then right-
click the job to display the context menu.

Available features:

1. Job Tracker – Select this command to display the

selected job within Job Tracker.

2. Job Entry – Select this command to display the

selected job within Job Entry.

3. Start Time – Select this command to move the

scheduling board to the start time of the job.

4. Move Time/Item – Select this command to adjust the

time or position of the item.

5. Multi Resource Schedule Board – Select this

command to display the selected job within the Multi 1
Resource Scheduling Board. This program is described 2
later in this chapter.
3
6. Lock Schedule – Select this command to prevent the 4
selected job from being rescheduled. 5

7. Unlock Schedule – Select this command to allow the 6

selected locked job to be rescheduled. 7

For more information about these programs, N

review Chapter 12: Job Management.

Job Scheduling Board – Toggle Buttons

The Job Scheduling Board contains additional buttons on its Standard toolbar. Use these buttons to either display or hide various items
on the scheduling board. Available buttons: 1 3 5 7 9
1. User Preferences – Click this
button to launch the
Scheduling Board
Preferences window. Use this window to personalize the 2 4 6 8
scheduling board. The next section, Job Scheduling Board
– User Preferences, explores these options.

2. Toggle Queue Time – Click this button to hide or display Queue Time. When this option is off, the button is not available and
job queue times do not display.

3. Toggle Completion Time – Click this button to hide or display Completion Time in the schedule board. When this option is
off, the button is not available and job completion times do not display.

4. Toggle Original Time – If this option is active, a moved job’s original time displays on the schedule board. It displays this time
using the color for What-If changes.

5. Toggle Move Time – Click this button to hide or display Move Time in the schedule board. When this option is off, the button
is not available and job move times do not display.

6. Toggle Reschedule Screen – If this option is active, the Reschedule Confirmation dialog box displays each time you click and
drag a job’s schedule to a new location. When this option is off, this dialog box does not display.

7. Toggle View Only – If this option is active, the board is in View Only Mode. You cannot make changes to the schedule.

8. Increase Height – Click to increase the height of each row. Each time you click this button, the height of each row increases.

9. Decrease Height – Click to shrink the height of each row. Each time you click this button, the height of each row decreases.

386 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SCHEDULING | CHAPTER 14

Job Scheduling Board – User Preferences

You can personalize the look of this scheduling board through the Scheduling Board Preferences window. Click the User Preferences
button on the Standard toolbar to launch this window.

Available features: 2 3
1. Type – This list displays the
scheduling types shown on 1
the board. If you need, you
can change the type’s name.
To do this, double-click the
type. The cursor appears
within the cell, and you can
edit the text as you need.

2. Default Timeframe – You

can expand or contract the
timeframe display. To do this,
click anywhere within the
date or day column headings 4
and then drag your mouse to
7 5
the left or right. Dragging to
the left expands the 6
timeframe until it displays
each day in minutes and even seconds. When you drag to the right, it You can also expand or contract the timeframe on
continues to contract the timeframe until it eventually displays a yearly the actual scheduling board. The timeframe you
scale. define here, however, becomes the default setting.
3. Personalization – Use these options to modify the colors used for the
different schedule types. You can modify the font, font size, refresh interval, and other options.

4. Assembly Move Option – Select an option from this list to define what happens when you move an assembly on the
scheduling board. Depending on what you select, the scheduling board adjusts parent and child assemblies differently in relation
to their preceding, subsequent, or all operations.

5. Operation Move Option – Select an option from this list to define what happens when you move an operation on the
scheduling board. Depending on what you select, the scheduling board adjusts operations differently in relation to their
preceding, subsequent, or all operations.

6. Scheduling Bar Text – Select an option from this list to define the text that displays on scheduling bars. These options include
Job (Assembly/Seq), Part Number, and Customer ID/Job.

7. When you finish modifying the board, click the Apply button. The changes you made to the board’s display now appear.

Job Scheduling Board – Move Job

You use the Schedule sheet to make changes to each job. After you make these changes, they appear visually on the sheet, so you
can verify this job’s revised schedule works with all the other jobs at the manufacturing center.

You make these changes through the Move Job window. To display this window:

1. On the display, either double-click the

job’s scheduling bar or click and drag
the scheduling bar to the right or left.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 387

CHAPTER 14 | SCHEDULING

2. The Move Job window displays. 2

The main information about the
job displays within the Job section.

3. Information about the current assembly

displays within the Assembly section.

4. The Current section displays details

about the selected operation.
4 3
5. The Proposed Changes area contains
the options you have for moving a job.
To change the scheduling 5
method, select either the 8
Forward or Backward option. 6 7
10
For information about the 9 11
Forward and Backward 12
scheduling methods, read the
Scheduling Features section at
the beginning of this chapter.

6. If you select the Forward schedule method, the Start Date and Start Time fields become active. Enter the date and time you
want the job to start within these fields.

7. If you select the Backward schedule method, the Due Date and Due Time fields become active. Enter the date and time you
want the job to end within these fields.

8. The Move Option drop-down list contains the options available for moving a job. Select one of these options:

• Job - All Operations – This option reschedules operations on this resource group. However, if multiple operations for a single
job are scheduled at this resource group, this option leaves gaps for intervening operations on additional resource groups.

• Branch - Preceding Operations – This option reschedules the selected operation and the preceding operations for the
assembly. It then reschedules operations contained in any preceding assemblies within the method.

• Branch - Subsequent Operations – This option reschedules the selected operation and subsequent operations for the
assembly. It then reschedules operations contained in any subsequent assemblies within the method.

• Assembly - All Operations – This option reschedules all the operations on the assembly around the selected operation. If
multiple operations for a single assembly are scheduled at this resource group, this option leaves gaps for any intervening
operations on additional resource groups.

9. A material can be defined as a constrained material, indicating the For more information about material constraints and
materials must be available for issuing to schedule operation. However, finite capacity, read the Scheduling Features section
to ignore constraints placed on this job's materials, select the Override at the beginning of this chapter.
Material Constraints check box.

10. To reschedule this job so that its calculations consider the limited daily capacities available on resource groups, select the Finite
Capacity check box.

11. Select the Update Job Operation Detail check box to change the resource originally defined in the Job Operation Detail with
the resource currently specified on the Move Job window. Both the resource group and the capability values also update to
reflect the new resource. Use this feature when you need to change the original resource defined on the job record.

This check box is available under these conditions:

• If the scheduling blocks assigned to this operation equal one.

• If the Prevent Changes check box is selected within the Company Configuration > Job module sheet.

This check box is not available under these conditions:

• If the scheduling blocks assigned to this operation is greater than one.

• If the Prevent Changes check box is clear (not selected) within the Company Configuration > Job module sheet.

388 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SCHEDULING | CHAPTER 14

12. When you finish, click OK.

The job is now rescheduled on the scheduling board, using your changes.

Job Scheduling Board – Detail

For your reference, the Job Scheduling Board displays complete information about each job. This information displays on the Details
sheet. To use this sheet:

1. On the Schedule sheet, from the Job list, select the job you want
to review.

2. Click the Detail tab.

3. The job’s details display. The Job

section displays the main information
about the job - the Job Number, Part,
Start Date, Production Quantity, 3 4
and other details.

4. The Assembly section displays

information about the selected
assembly. The Assembly Number,
Part, Revision, and other details
display. 5
5. The Operation section displays details
about the current operation like Start 7
Date, Due Date, Resource Group,
and so on.

6. The Material Constraints grid 6

displays any materials that must be
available before operations are
scheduled on the current job.

7. The Resource grid displays the

resources, if any, that are linked to the
operation.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 389

CHAPTER 14 | SCHEDULING

Job Scheduling Board – Actions Menu

You finish or remove your scheduling changes through the commands on the Actions menu. You can also review the status of
materials, as well as the load on plants and resources groups.

Available features:

1. Undo All Changes – Select this command to return

the entire schedule to the state it was in before your
changes were made.
1
2. Undo Current Job Changes – Select this command
to return the schedule for a highlighted job to its 2
original state. 3
3. Accept All Changes – Select this command to
incorporate all the changes you made into the actual 4
schedule. 5

4. Accept Current Job Changes – Select this command

6 7
to incorporate any changes you have made to a
selected job into the actual schedule.

5. Save Schedule – Use this command to save the board 8

settings under the current schedule’s name. If this 9
schedule has not yet been saved under a name,
Schedule Maintenance displays where you can enter
the name for this schedule. 10

6. Restore Schedule – Use this command to bring back, 11

or restore, a specific schedule. When you select this
command, it causes Schedule Maintenance to display.
Use this program to select the schedule you wish to
restore.

7. View Log – Select this command to launch the Restore Log window. Use this window to review any errors (if any) that
occurred while a specific schedule was restored.

8. Material Status – Select this command to review the material requirements for the current job. This functionality displays all the
material requirements – including any stock assemblies that have pull quantities.

9. Resource Schedule Load Graph – Select this command to display the resource graph. Information about resource group and
resource schedules display through both a Resource Group Load Graph and a Resource Load Graph.

10. Plant Schedule Load Graph – Select this command to display the plant graph. Information about job department, company,
plant, or resource group schedules display. This includes both an Actual Capacity and Load Graph and a What If Hours
Graph.

11. Print – Run this command to send the schedule board to a Print Preview window. If you wish, you can then print this schedule.

Resource Scheduling Board

Use the Resource Scheduling Board to review and modify scheduled jobs at You create resources and resource groups through
both the resource and the resource group level. A resource can be a piece of Resource Group Maintenance. For more information
equipment (like a lathe), or a shop employee (like a machine setter). A on this important setup program, review
resource group consists of several related resources that can be scheduled as a Chapter 11: Engineering.
single unit.

This scheduling board’s interface is similar to the Job Scheduling Board. Some differences, however, exist between them. The next
sections explore these differences.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Scheduling > General Operations > Resource Scheduling Board

390 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SCHEDULING | CHAPTER 14

Use the Selection sheet to choose the resource or the resource group that you wish to view:

1. Select the Scheduling Board

Type you need. Available
options - Resource and
Resource Group.
1
2. Depending on the board type 3 4
you select, either the
Resource or the Resource
Group field is active. You can
enter the resource or group 2
you want directly, or you can
click the Search buttons to
find and select the resource
or group you need.

3. In the Start Date field, enter

the first date of the calendar
range you wish to view.

4. In the End Date field, enter

the last date of the calendar
range you wish to view. The
scheduling data generated both on and If your company purchased the Advanced Planning and Scheduling (APS) module,
between the Start Date and End Date you can also schedule resources by capability. Capabilities are skills and
displays on the scheduling board. abilities that resources possess, like turning, painting, drilling, and so on. These
capabilities are then linked to specific resources and resource groups. For more
You are now ready to view the schedule for the information about capabilities, review the Scheduling Technical Reference Guide
selected resource or resource group. available in the application help.

Resource Scheduling Board - Schedule

To view the manufacturing activity for the resource or resource group, use the Schedule tab. The interface is similar to the Schedule
sheet within the Job Scheduling Board; however, the Resource Scheduling Board displays the schedule of all operations processed by
the resource or group.

Available features: 5 6
1. Operations List – This panel displays
the primary information for each
2 4
operation. It first displays the Job
Number/Assembly Sequence 3
Number/Operation Sequence
Number. You can then scroll this list to
the left to display the operation’s
Part Number, Customer ID, 1
Operation Code, Setup Group,
Start Date, and Days Late.

2. Schedule Display Area – This panel

visually displays the schedules of each
selected operation. Depending on the operation’s status, a different color bar appears for the operation’s scheduled duration.

3. To move backwards through the calendar, click the Left Arrow button.

4. To move forwards through the calendar, click the Right Arrow button.

5. You can jump to a specific point within the calendar by using the Goto field. To do this, click the Down Arrow, and select a
specific date from the drop-down calendar.

6. Use the Sort By field to change how the operations are organized on the Schedule panel. You can sort the operations by Start
Date, Setup Group, Part, Customer ID, and Operation Code.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 391

CHAPTER 14 | SCHEDULING

Resource Scheduling Board – Move Job

The Schedule Display Area works in the same way as the Job Scheduling Board. Use this display to make changes to a job and then
view its impact on other jobs. On this scheduling board, however, the changes you make occur at the operation level.

Make these changes in the Move Job window. To launch this window:

1. On the display, either double-click the

operation’s scheduled hours or click
and drag the hours to the right or left.

2. The Move Job window 2

displays. This window is
nearly identical to the
window that displays within
the Job Scheduling Board.
However, some additional
options are available.

3. From the Move Option drop-

down list, select the
Operation Only option. This
move option reschedules the
operation, but it leaves all the
other operations in their 3
original schedules.
4 6
For a complete list of the 5
other move options, review 7
the Job Scheduling Board – 8
Move Job section found
earlier in this chapter.

4. You can also select a different resource to run the changes you are making to the job. To do this, click the Resource drop-down
list and select the resource you need.

5. If the production is finished on this operation, select the Production Complete check box.

6. If the setup is finished on this operation, select the Setup Complete check box.

7. If the number of scheduling blocks used to schedule this job equals 1, the Update Job Operation Detail check box is available.
Select this check box to indicate the operation needs to be updated with the resource selected on the Resource drop-down list.
When you save this change, this resource is updated within the job record.

8. When you finish making changes to the job operation, click OK. Your You can also modify other options within the
changes now display on the Resource Scheduling Board. Proposed Changes section. For details on these
fields, review the Job Scheduling Board - Move Job
section found earlier in this chapter.

392 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SCHEDULING | CHAPTER 14

Resource Scheduling Board – Load Leveling

Both the Standard toolbar and the Actions menu on this scheduling board contain the same controls that are on the Job Scheduling
Board. The Standard toolbar contains view options that you can toggle on or off. The Actions menu also contains the same commands
you use to save and undo changes.

The Load Leveling function, however, is unique to the Resource Scheduling Board. Use this function to compress the operations on a
resource group so that no time exists between them. This helps you prevent uneven loads on resources and eliminates any idle time at
resource groups that typically bottleneck.

Load Leveling takes all jobs that fall within a given date range and reschedules them so that the total load on a specific resource
becomes smoother.

The changes made by Load Leveling are What-If schedule changes only – you need to accept them before they become part of your
actual schedule.

You can launch this window in two ways:

1. Click the Load Level button on the Standard

toolbar, or click the Actions menu; select
Load Level.

To learn about these options, review the 1

Job Scheduling Board - Toggle Buttons
and Job Scheduling Board - Actions
Menu sections found earlier
in this chapter.

2. The Load Leveling 2

window displays.

3. In the Start Date field, enter 3

the date on which the first
4
operation included in load
leveling begins. The default is 5
either tomorrow’s date or the
highlighted operation’s
Scheduled Start Date –
whichever is later.

4. Next, in the New Start Date

field, enter the date that is used the next time you launch load leveling. By default, this value is the Start Date displayed during
your next load leveling session.

5. In the Cut Off Date field, enter the final date on which operations should be included during this load leveling process. The
default date is the What-If start date for the last operation on the scheduling board. Operations that have a start date on or
before this date are included in the load leveling.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 393

CHAPTER 14 | SCHEDULING

6. Use the Move Option drop-

down list to define how the
schedule is adjusted with the 6
potential changes. The
options are: 7
8
• Job – All Operations –
This option reschedules
operations on this resource
group. However, if multiple 9
operations for a single job
are scheduled at this
resource group, this option
leaves gaps for any intervening operations on additional resource groups.

• Branch – Preceding Operations – This option reschedules the selected operation and the preceding operations for the
assembly. It then reschedules operations contained in any preceding assemblies within the method.

• Branch – Subsequent Operations – This option reschedules the selected operation and subsequent operations for the
assembly. It then reschedules operations contained in any subsequent assemblies within the method.

• Assembly – All Operations – This option reschedules all the operations on the assembly around the selected operation. If
multiple operations for a single assembly are scheduled at this resource group, this option leaves gaps for any intervening
operations on additional resource groups.

• Assembly – Preceding Operations – This option reschedules the selected operation and all operations for this assembly that
come before it.

• Assembly – Subsequent Operations – This option reschedules the selected operation and all operations for this assembly
that come after it.

• Operation Only – This option only reschedules the selected operation.

7. Now click the Load Level By drop-down list to define what value you use to level the load. Available options:

• Start Date – This value is the start date defined on this window.

• Setup Group – This option causes the Setup Group Scheduling Order To learn more about setup groups, review
window to display. These groups are used to sort schedules on your board. the Setup Group Maintenance topic
within application help.
• Operation Code – This operation levels the load by operation.

8. If you want load leveling to evaluate scheduling priorities, select the Consider Priority check box. These values indicate if some
jobs have precedence over other jobs. Scheduling priorities are defined in Job Entry.

9. When you finish, click OK.

The functionality compresses the operations on the selected resource or resource group. When the process is complete, click the
Schedule tab, review the changes and from the Actions menu, select the Accept All Changes.

394 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SCHEDULING | CHAPTER 14

Resource Scheduling Board – Details

For your reference, the Resource Scheduling Board displays the main information about each job and operation. This information is
displayed on the Details sheet.

To use this sheet:

1. On the Schedule sheet’s Operation List, select the operation you want to review.

2. Click the Detail tab.

3. The selected job and

operation details display. The 2 3
Job section displays the main
information about the 4
selected job - the Job
Number, Part, Start Date,
Production Quantity, and
other details.

4. The Assembly section 5

displays details about the
selected assembly. The
Assembly Number, Part, 6
Revision, and other details
display.

5. The Operation section

displays details about the
current operation like Start
Date, Due Date, Resource
Group, and so on.

6. The Material Constraints grid displays any materials on this operation that are constrained within the schedule.

Multi Resource Scheduling Board

Use the Multi Resource Scheduling Board to review and modify scheduled jobs at the The Multi Resource Scheduling Board is only
resource. You can review the schedule for one resource or for many resources. available if you have the license for Advanced
Planning and Scheduling (APS) installed.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Scheduling > General Operations > Multi Resource Scheduling Board

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 395

CHAPTER 14 | SCHEDULING

To review the schedule for a resource:

1. Click the Resource button to

find and select the resources
you need.
1 6 2 3
2. In the Start Date field,
enter the first date of the
calendar range you wish to 4 5
view.

3. In the End Date field, enter

the last date of the calendar
range you wish to view. The
scheduling data generated on
and between the Start Date
and End Date displays on the
scheduling board. You are
now ready to view the
schedule for the selected
resources.

4. The Schedule sheet displays the schedule for the selected resources. This interface is similar to the Schedule sheet within the
Resource Scheduling Board.

5. The Detail sheet displays specific information on a selected resource. This interface is similar to the Detail sheet within the
Resource Scheduling Board.

6. The List sheet displays the operations for the selected resources.

Multi Resource Scheduling Board - Schedule

Use the Schedule sheet to review and modify the production schedules for the selected resources.

1. The Resource ID and

Resource description display 6
in the left panel for the
selected resources. 1 4 2 5
2. The Schedule Display Area
visually displays the schedules
of each selected resource.
Depending on the resource
status, a different color bar
appears for the resource’s 3
scheduled duration.

3. To modify the production

schedule of a resource, click
the beginning of the
resource’s schedule bar and
then drag it to a new start
date on the schedule display.
The Move Job window
displays. The window is
similar to the one that
displays within the Resource
Scheduling Board.

4. To move backwards through the calendar, click the Left Arrow button.

5. To move forwards through the calendar, click the Right Arrow button.

6. You can jump to a specific point within the calendar by using the Goto field. To do this, use the Down Arrow to select a
specific date.

396 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SCHEDULING | CHAPTER 14

Reports
This section describes some key Scheduling reports. You can run these reports whenever you need or set up each report to generate
and print through a recurring, automatic schedule. Review the Automatic Data Processing in the Epicor ERP Implementation Guide for
information on how you link a report to a recurring schedule.

Shop Load Report

The Shop Load report prints the load hours for each operation scheduled Production Load is the total hours that remain to
within each resource group. Load hours are the hours that remain on an complete an operation’s production. Setup Load is
operation before it is complete. To calculate the load hours, this report adds the total hours that remain to complete an
together the Setup Load and the Production Load for each operation. operation’s setup. For more information about load,
review the Scheduling Concepts section found at the
Closed jobs and complete operations do not display on this report. If the load
beginning of this chapter.
calculation results in zero hours, or if the operation scheduled Start Date is
later than the Cut Off Date, the operation does not print.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Scheduling > Reports > Shop Load

To define the Shop Load report options:

1. In the Cut Off Date field,

enter the first date that load
is calculated. All operations
running on or after this date
display on the report.

2. Next, select an option in the 6 7

Units area. This defines the
time scale that you want each
column to represent. Available 1
options: Week and Days.
2
3. The Interval field defines the
3
time span placed between
each column, using the time 4
scale you selected in the Units
5
area. This value, combined
with the Units value, indicates
how the column headings are
printed on the report. For
example, you enter a cutoff
date of 04/30/2011, use the
Week time unit, and enter an
Interval of 1. The column
headings that print are 04/01/11 – 04/07/11, 04/08/11 – 04/14/11, and so on.

4. If needed, select the First Bucket is Infinite? check box. This indicates overdue hours display on the report. The first column
includes all load hours scheduled before the Cut Off Date – as well as the current hours. If selected, this check box also causes
the report to ignore the Interval value.

5. Select the Summary Only check box to limit the report to only display resource group, department, and report total
information.

6. Use the sheets on the Filter tab to limit the Resource Groups and the Departments that display. Select the specific
departments and resource groups that you want on the report.

7. When you finish, click Print on the Standard toolbar.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 397

CHAPTER 14 | SCHEDULING

Priority Dispatch Report

The Priority Dispatch report communicates the work schedule to the shop floor employees. The report is designed to answer the
question, “What should/could we be working on today?” Typically you print this report to display one page for each resource group;
each page is then either given to the shop supervisor for that group or posted within the work area. The report divides its information
into the following sections – Current Work, Available Work, and Expected Work.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Scheduling > Reports > Priority Dispatch

To define the Priority Dispatch report options:

1. Use the Max No of

Operations to List Per
Resource Group field to limit
how many operations display
for each selected resource
group. The default value is 10
999, which means that all
operations are listed. 9 1 6
2. Next, use the Operations 2
due to start on or before
3 7
field to define the last date
that prints on the report. Only 4
operations scheduled to start 5 8
on or before this date display.

3. Select the New Page Per

Resource Group check box if
you want this report to start
on a different page for each
resource group.

4. Select the Print Labor

Reporting Resource Only
check box if you want this
report to only print the labor
reporting resource.

5. Select the List All Scheduled Resources check box if you want this report to include all scheduled resources.

6. Select the Material Status check box to include the material status on the report.

7. If the Material Status check box is selected, the Summary\Detail check box activates. Select this check box to include
summary and detail information.

8. To include totals on the report, select the Print Totals check box.

9. Use the sheets on the Filter tab to limit the Resource Groups and the Departments that display. Select the specific
departments and resource groups you want on the report.

10. When you finish, click Print on the Standard toolbar.

Schedule Impact Report

Use the Schedule Impact report to analyze the effect of different scheduling dates on current jobs. You use this report to compare
early, late, and on time jobs between the actual and what-if schedules. After reviewing this report, you can then accept or reject the
what-if jobs on the scheduling boards.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Scheduling > Reports > Schedule Impact

398 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SCHEDULING | CHAPTER 14

To define the Schedule Impact report options:

1. In the Jobs Required Dates On or

Before field, enter the primary date
you use. All jobs whose Required By
date is on or before this date display
on this report.
10
2. Use the Early Grace Period (Days)
field to define how many days a job 9
can be completed early and still be
considered on time. If you enter a zero,
a job scheduled to complete one day 1
before the What-If date is considered
2
early by the report.
3
3. Use the Late Grace Period (Days)
field to define how many days a job 4
can be late and still be considered on
time – in relationship with its What-If
date. If you enter a zero, a job
scheduled to complete one day after
the What-If date is considered late by 5 8
the report. 6
4. Use the Report Name field to identify
these report options. If you wish to run
this version of the report at a later
date, you can pull up this version
again. The operations stay the same,
but you need to change the Jobs
7
Required Dates On or Before date.

5. You are now ready to define what

specific jobs display on the report.
Select the Summary Only check box
to display the late, early, and on time
job totals in relationship with each job’s What-If date.

6. If you clear the Summary Only check box, other check boxes on this window become active. Select the Late Jobs as One
Group check box to display all the late jobs together on the report. If you do not select the Late Jobs as One Group check box,
you can select one or multiple late job check box options. Available options:

• Jobs Now Late – Select this check box to display jobs that are just late in relationship with their What-If dates.

• Jobs More Late – Select this check box to display jobs that are even later in relationship with their What-If dates.

• Jobs Less Late – Select this check box to display jobs that are still late, but less late than they originally were in relationship
with their What-If dates.

• Late Jobs Unaffected – Select this check box to display late jobs that are not changed by their What-If dates.

7. Select the Ontime Jobs as One Group check box to display all the on time jobs together on the report. If you do not select the
OnTime Jobs as One Group check box, you can select one or multiple on time job options. Available options:

• Jobs Now Ontime – Select this check box to display jobs that are on time in relationship with their What-If dates.

• Ontime Jobs Unaffected – Select this check box to display on time jobs that are not affected by their What-If dates.

8. Select the Early Jobs as One Group check box to display all the early jobs together on the report. If you do not select the Early
Jobs as One Group check box, you can select one or multiple early job options. Available options:

• Jobs Now Early – Select this check box to display jobs that are early in relationship with their What-If dates.

• Jobs More Early – Select this check box to display jobs that are even earlier in relationship with their What-If dates.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 399

CHAPTER 14 | SCHEDULING

• Jobs Less Early – Select this check box to display jobs that are still early, but less early than they originally were in relationship
with their What-If dates.

• Early Jobs Unaffected – Select this check box to display early jobs that are not affected by their What-If dates.

9. Click the Filter tab to limit the Plants that display on the report.

10. When you finish, click Print on the Standard toolbar.

Overload Informer
The Overload Informer displays resources that have work time scheduled above
You can filter the information that displays on
their capacity to complete. This tool displays both the actual and what-if
the Overload Informer by entering a value within
schedules for the selected resources. Run this tool when you schedule resources
the Minimum Overload Percentage field on
using infinite capacity. The key information this tool displays is the Hours Over
resources and/or groups. This field is available in
Capacity and Percent Over values. Use these values to determine which resources
Resource Group Maintenance.
are currently overloaded by the actual or what-if schedules.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Scheduling > General Operations > Overload Informer

Use the Advanced Search sheet to define what you want to display:

1. In the Cut-off Date field, enter the last date

you wish the Overload Informer to review.
All resources that are overloaded on or 7
before this date display.

2. To filter the results by Dept, select an option

from the drop-down list. Job departments
place similar resource groups together so
you can quickly find related information on
the Overload Informer and reports.

To learn more about departments, 1

review the Job Department Maintenance
topic within application help. 2
3
3. You can also limit the results to only display
resources contained within a specific 4
resource group. To do this, select a 5
Resource Group from the drop-down list.
6
4. You can further limit the results to only
display a specific resource. To do this, enter
the resource’s identifier in the Resource ID
field.

5. To limit the results by overload percentage, enter a value within the Percent Over field. If a resource has an overload percentage
that is greater than or equal to this value, it displays within the results. This value is only for times calculated in the actual
schedule.

6. To limit the results by the what-if overload percentages, enter a value within the WI Percent Over field. All resources that have
an overload percentage greater than or equal to this value now display. This value is only for times calculated in the current
what-if schedule.

7. When you have defined the filters you want, click the Refresh All button. You can now review the overloaded resources on the
Actual and What-If sheets.

400 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SCHEDULING | CHAPTER 14

Overload Informer – Actual

Select the Actual tab to review which resources are currently overloaded. Available columns on this sheet::

1. The Date column displays the

day on which this resource is
overloaded.

2. The Dept column displays the

job department that contains
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
the overloaded resource
group.

3. The Resource Group Desc

column displays the resource
group that contains the
overloaded resource.

4. The Resource Desc column

displays the specific resource that is currently overloaded within the actual schedule.

5. The Hours column displays the total hours scheduled for the resource.

6. The Hours Over Capacity column displays how many hours have been scheduled above the resource’s capacity.

7. The Percent Over column displays the percentage by which the resource is overloaded.

8. Resources can also be limited based on volume or other factors. The Non Time Capacity column indicates a limit to the
resource other than time. For example, a rack resource has 10 available racks that can be filled each day. This column displays
the number 10 in this field.

Use the information in this sheet to help you adjust how resources are currently used on the actual schedule.

Overload Informer – What If

Use the What-If sheet to review which resources are overloaded if you accept what-if scheduling. Use this sheet to help you decide
whether or not you accept the what-if schedule. Available columns:

1. The Date column displays the

day when this resource is
scheduled to be overloaded.

2. The Dept column displays the

job department that contains
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
the overloaded resource
group.

3. The Resource Group Desc

column displays the resource
group that contains the
overloaded resource.

4. The Resource Desc column displays the specific resource currently overloaded within the what-if schedule.

5. The Hours Over Capacity column displays how many hours are what-if scheduled above the resource’s capacity.

6. The WI Percent Over column displays the percentage by which the resource is overloaded through the what-if schedule.

7. Resources can also be limited based on volume or other factors. The WI Non Time Capacity column indicates another limit to
the resource besides time. For example, you have a rack resource that has 10 available racks that can be filled each day. This
column displays the number 10 in this field.

8. The WI Daily Production Qty indicates how many items can be produced by this resource per day within the what-if
schedule. For example, a rack can heat treat 100 parts/day, so the daily production quantity is 100.

Use the information displayed in this sheet to help you adjust how resources are currently used on the what-if schedule.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 401

CHAPTER 14 | SCHEDULING

402 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

Chapter 15
Purchasing

Purchase Management and its associated Supplier Relationship Management and Purchase Contract modules handle entering
purchase orders and tracking supplier performance. The central program that controls purchasing activity is Purchase Order
Entry. Each purchase order (PO) can contain multiple detail lines, and each detail line indicates planned receipts to inventory,
direct receipts to a sales order, or direct receipts to a manufacturing job. Purchase order receipt processing also updates
suggested supplier and detailed purchase history files, so your purchasing history is continuously updated to help you make
future purchasing decisions.

Both contract and consolidated purchase orders (POs) can also be created through Purchase Order Entry. Through these
additional module licenses, you create a contract PO with a specific supplier to purchase part quantities using a recurring,
regular schedule. The contract PO is active throughout the purchase schedule as various receipt transactions are placed
against it to satisfy the requirements of the contract. Consolidated purchase orders are global POs you can create to buy part
quantities for all the companies within your organization. Each release on a consolidated PO can be designated for a selected
company, plant, and warehouse, ensuring that the correct parts and quantities arrive where they are needed.

If your organization licenses the Supplier Relationship Management (SRM) module, you can leverage the request for quote
(RFQ) functionality. Use this feature set to create request for quote records that you then send out to various competing
suppliers. You evaluate the responses from these suppliers in order to decide which businesses can provide your company
with the quantities, price points, and delivery dates you need for your manufacturing and servicing business flow.

The RFQ information can then be reviewed through a central SRM tool, the Buyer Workbench. Through this tool, buyers can
see the current state of their RFQs and purchase orders. All the entry programs involved in the purchasing process can be
launched through this tool, including Purchase Order Entry, RFQ Entry, and various Suggestion programs. When you combine
Purchase Management with the added SRM tools, purchase contracts, and multi-site functionality, you have complete control
over your purchasing business flow.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 403

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

Setup
This section describes the primary records you need to create for the purchasing functionality. These programs are contained within the
Setup folder for the Purchase Management module. Only the primary records are described here. Some areas within the next
Operations section may also document setup records if they are required for a specific workflow.

You may also need to set up some parameters within Company Configuration. Some modules have global settings you define through
this administration program. For more information, review application help for the Purchase Management module; the Configuration
topic details the options you define within Company Configuration. You can also review the Company Configuration chapter in the
Epicor ERP Implementation Guide.

Buyer
Use Buyer Maintenance to define records for buyers responsible for your company’s purchasing activities. You select buyers in the
purchase orders you create. Buyer Maintenance is an important program, as the values you define for your buyers affect the entire
purchasing flow. You can use it to link a buyer to a part class and specify approved purchase amounts for buyers.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Buyer

To add a new buyer:

1. Click New on the

Standard toolbar. 1

2. Enter an identifier in the

Buyer field. This value
uniquely identifies the record 2
on various reports.
3
9
3. Optionally, select the 4
Person/Contact identifier for
this buyer record if one exists. 5 10
If one does not exist, the
6
application uses the values in
the buyer information fields 7
to automatically create a
8
person/contact record.

If you have an individual

who needs to be defined
on multiple records, like a
shop employee who is also
a buyer, you can define this
person in Person/ Contact
Maintenance first and then
link this person record to
other records throughout
the application. To learn
about this functionality,
review the Personnel
chapter in the Epicor ERP
Implementation Guide.

4. In the Name field, enter the complete name for this buyer. This value displays on various purchasing programs and reports.

5. Enter a PO Limit for this buyer. This value defines how much the buyer can spend on each purchase order. If this value is set to
0 (zero), the buyer has unlimited purchasing capability.

404 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

6. Select an Approval Person. This individual is the person who verifies purchases for this buyer when the buyer’s total amount of
purchases exceeds the PO Limit.

7. Enter the Email Address for this buyer.

8. Select the Consolidated Purchasing check box to indicate this buyer can make global purchases. The new Buyer ID must
If your organization has the Multi-Site Management license, this check box is available. The also be added as an
consolidated purchasing functionality controls purchasing and accounts payable functions across authorized user in order to
multiple companies, even though companies may exist on separate servers and databases. When view purchase orders.
you assign a buyer these rights, this individual can create global purchase orders that split off
quantities to separate companies and plants for receipt. For more information, review the
Consolidated Purchase Orders section later in this chapter.

9. If you want this buyer record to be the first option that displays on Buyer drop-down lists throughout the application, select the
System Default check box.

10. If you want name and email address changes made to this buyer record to automatically update the linked person record within
Person/Contact Maintenance, select the Sync. Name and/or Sync. Email check boxes.

11. You next define the users

who can make purchases 14
on behalf of the buyer.
These individuals are 11
called authorized users.
To add an Authorized User to
the buyer record, click the
Down Arrow next to the
New button; select New
Authorized User.

12. Click the User drop-down list

to select an individual who 12 13
will be able to make
purchases for this buyer. All
users entered through User
Maintenance (a System
Management program)
display on this list.

13. If the authorized user record

can be a default user for this
buyer, select the Default
Buyer check box. In order to define a team of individuals who can make purchases for this buyer, you can select this check box
on multiple default user records.

14. When you finish, click Save.

Part Maintenance
You enter and update records for parts you purchase through Part Maintenance. This program contains default values you use with
purchased parts. By establishing these default values, you simplify user workflows and eliminate redundant keystrokes when you enter
your purchase orders.

This section assumes you have already created purchased part records, but still need to update them to contain the current purchasing
information.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Part

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 405

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

To update purchasing information on a part:

1. Click the Part button to find

and select the purchased part
record you want to update.

2. In the Part Search window, you can filter the

search to only retrieve purchased parts by
clicking the Part Type drop-down list and
selecting the Purchased option.

3. Click Search.

4. Select the appropriate part from the search 3

results.
2
5. Click OK.

6. Each purchased part has a

Primary Purchasing Unit of
Measure. This value can be
identical or different from the
Primary Units of Measure 7
defined for Inventory or
Sales. The Inventory unit of
measure defines the standard
measure used for this
purchased part in your stock, 6
while the Sales unit of
measure defines the standard
measure used for this
purchased part by your
customer.

7. If this part record can be used 8

across multiple companies
within your organization,
select the Global check box.
This record is now considered
a global purchased part by the
application, and the record
can be used on purchase
orders across all companies
within your organization.

406 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

8. After you select the Global check box, you can then select the Consolidated Purchasing check box. This indicates buyers can
select this part on consolidated purchase orders. These purchase orders can be used to buy part quantities and services for all
companies within your organization. To learn more about how to create multi-company purchases, review the Consolidated
Purchase Orders section later in this chapter.

9. The Plants > Detail sheet

contains additional purchasing
information for parts.

10. Select the Buyer responsible

for making purchases for this
part. You create buyer records
within Buyer Maintenance, a 9
program described in the
previous section.

11. Enter a Min Order Qty value.

This value defines the
smallest, or minimum quantity
that must be ordered for each
purchase order release from 10 14
the primary supplier.
12 11
12. The Lead Time value defines 13
how long, in days, it takes for
the primary supplier to fill
purchase orders for this part.
15
This value is used by the
Material Requirements
Planning (MRP) functionality to determine when purchased part quantities are available for use within your manufacturing center.

13. Click the Supplier button to find and select the supplier. You can also enter the supplier directly.

14. Select the Generate PO Suggestions check box if you want the application to automatically create a list of suggested
purchases based on time-phased information. To do this, you use the Generate PO Suggestions functionality. You can then create
actual purchase orders from these suggestions in Purchase Order Entry. This functionality is described later in this chapter.

15. If you select the Allow Consumption of Minimum Qty check box on the plant record, you can define Urgent Planning options.
These options are an alternate set of values available when you generate PO suggestions. If the projected On-Hand Quantity falls
below the Safety Stock quantity during the lead time date range (MRP Scheduled Start Date + Lead Time), the Urgent Planning
values are used to calculate the PO suggestion quantities instead. Through these parameters, you can define the specific
quantities, lead times, and suppliers to use for immediate supply needs.

16. You can also enter

comments for each 19
purchased part. To do this,
navigate to the Reporting >
Comments > Purchasing
sheet. 17 16

17. Enter the text you need in the

Purchasing Comments field.

18. To copy these comments to

the Manufacturing
Comments sheet, click the
Duplicate button.

19. When you finish updating the

purchased part record, click
Save on the Standard 18
toolbar.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 407

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

Supplier Maintenance
Suppliers are businesses from whom you purchase products and services. Use the Supplier Maintenance program to create supplier
records. These records are used in several programs, and are required for creating purchase orders and accounts payable invoices.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Supplier

To add a supplier:

1. Click New on the

Standard toolbar. 1

2. Enter a Supplier ID. This

value is the primary identifier
used on various programs and
reports for this supplier. 2
4
3. Enter the Name of this 3
supplier.

Each supplier is 8 5
automatically assigned a
6
unique internal number.
This internal number 7
(which you do not see and
cannot change) causes the 9
application to rapidly 10
14
access the supplier record. 11 12
Since this internal number 15
13
never changes, you can
change the Supplier ID. To 16
do this, click the Change
ID button.

4. If this supplier record can be

used across multiple
companies within your organization, select the Global check box. This record is now considered a global supplier by the
application, and the record can be accessed across all companies within your organization.

5. After you select the Global check box, you can then select the Consolidated Purchasing check box. This indicates you can
select this supplier record on multi-company, or consolidated purchase orders. A buyer can then create a purchase order for this
supplier that purchases quantities or services for all companies within your organization. For more details about how to create
multi-company purchases, review the Consolidated Purchase Orders section later in this chapter.

6. The Approved check box is selected by default when entering a new supplier.

7. If you want all materials purchased from this supplier to be evaluated for quality, select the Inspection Required check box. Any
materials purchased from this supplier are automatically received into inspection; you cannot change this value during purchase
order entry or receipt entry. If you do not select this check box on the supplier record, however, you can select it later during
either purchase order entry or receipt entry.

8. Optionally, select the default language that prints on reports from the Language drop-down list. By default, all part Description
values that use this selected language also display on these reports.

9. If you need, enter the Account Ref number for the account you have with this supplier.

10. Optionally, select the Group you want for this supplier record. Supplier groups organize your supplier records along any criteria
you need, like Plastic Supply or Paint Services. You create these groups within Supplier Group Maintenance and then select
them from this drop-down list. For details about this program, review application help.

11. Use the Country Entry field to specify the Intrastat code for the area or city that is the entry point for goods shipped from this
supplier. Leave this field blank to use the Border Crossing value within the Country record.

12. If you want, select the default payment Terms by which this supplier bills your company. Payment terms define when payment
discounts and late fees are assessed against an Accounts Payable invoice.

408 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

13. Use the Calendar button to find and select the production calendar this supplier uses to manufacture products. This calendar is
useful for determining when a purchased quantity will arrive at your company.

14. Click the FOB drop-down list to select the free on board location for this supplier. This location indicates the point at which title
of the shipped goods changes from the supplier to your company. You create free on board options within FOB Maintenance.

15. If you want, enter the Minimum Order Value for this supplier. This value specifies the lowest total quantity amount you will
allow for any purchase order placed with this supplier. This field helps you avoid making small purchases below your company’s
normal order quantity. Whenever a total quantity on a purchase order is less than this value, a warning message displays.

16. Select the Payment Method you use to pay this supplier. These methods indicate whether the supplier is paid manually or
electronically. The option you select on this drop-down list becomes the default value on all Accounts Payable invoices and
Accounts Payable payment groups created for the supplier. If you need, you can override this method on a specific invoice or
payment group.

17. Enter address and phone

information on the Supplier >
Address sheet. These values
are the main remit-to address
for the supplier.

18. Use the Official Registration

section to enter the supplier’s
legal tax information used by
the taxing locality.
17

18

19. Optionally, select a 20

restriction type for this
supplier on the RoHS sheet.
You define restriction types
through the Substance
Restriction Type
Maintenance program. For 19
more information, review the
Epicor ERP Implementation
Guide.

20. When you finish, click Save.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 409

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

Purchase Points
Purchase points define alternate addresses for the supplier. Purchase points are locations from which the current supplier ships material
or provides services for your company.

To enter purchase points for the supplier:

1. Click the Down Arrow next

to the New button; select
New Purchase Point.

2. Enter a Purchase Point 1

number, Name, and
Mailing Address for each 3
supplier purchase point.

3. When selected, the Primary

Purchase Point check box 2
sets this purchase point as the
main location from where you
purchase goods or services
from this supplier. As you
create a purchase order for
this supplier, this purchase
point’s address is the default
address that populates the
purchase order’s address
fields.

Only one purchase

point can be selected
as the primary location for
each supplier.

Contacts
You can optionally enter contacts for each supplier and/or purchase point address. To enter contacts:

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 1
select New Contact or
New PP Contact. 10
2
2. The Contacts > Detail sheet
displays – either for the
supplier or the purchase 3
point – depending on the
option selected from the New 4
menu.
5 7 8
3. Optionally, select the
Person/Contact identifier for
6
this contact record if one
exists. If one does not exist,
the application uses the 9
values in the contact
information fields to
automatically create a
person/contact record.

4. In the Name field, enter the

contact’s complete name.

410 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

5. Optionally, use the Function, Role, Title, and Reports To fields to define If you have an individual who needs to be defined
this person’s position within the supplier organization. on multiple records, like a supplier contact who is
also a purchase point contact, you can define this
6. Enter the contact’s Email address.
person in Person/Contact Maintenance first and
7. Select the Primary Contact check box to indicate this person is the main then link this person record to other records
contact at this location. This individual displays by default on all Contact throughout the application. To learn about this
drop-down lists for records linked to this supplier. functionality, review the Personnel chapter in the
Epicor ERP Implementation Guide.
8. If you want name, email, phone, and weblink changes made to this
contact record to automatically update the person record within Person/Contact Maintenance, select the Sync. Name, Sync.
Phone, Sync. Email, and Sync. Links check boxes. Any data changes made within the selected fields automatically update
other records that share the same contact.

9. Use the fields within the Phone/Fax section to enter all of the contact’s phone numbers.

10. Continue to add the contacts you need. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Supplier Price Lists

Use Supplier Price List Maintenance to set up different price lists for suppliers defined in the application. This functionality is valuable
when you want to buy the same products from different suppliers with different price lists. Such lists can account for different
currencies, different situations (for example - promotional or retail), or seasons. You may also have different prices based on quantity
breaks for each supplier.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Supplier Price List

Add a Price List

1. Click the Supplier button to

find and select the Supplier
ID. You can also enter the
Supplier ID directly. When
selected, the supplier
1
description and currency
display.

2. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 2
select New Part.

3. Click the Part button to find

and select the part number.
You can also enter the part
number directly.
3
4. Click the Supplier UOM
drop-down list to select the 4
unit of measure this supplier
uses for this part.
5 7
5. Enter the Effective date and
Expires date for the price. 6
These values define the period
during which this price list is
considered active by the
application.

6. The application uses the

Effective date and Expires date
to calculate the number of
Days this price list is active.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 411

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

7. Enter the Base Unit Price for the part.

8. The Price Per value

13
defines the quantity
against which the Base Unit
Price is calculated. Select an
option from this drop-down
list. Available options:

• /1

• /100

• /1000

9. The Discount % specifies the

overall discount allowed by
this supplier. If you enter a 8
value in this field, it further 9
reduces the price of the
purchased parts. 10
11 12
10. You can also select a Price
Break Modifier, either a Flat
Unit Price or Percent of Base,
for the current part. The
selected modifier determines
the effective unit price for the related quantity.

11. The Conversion section defines the overall formula used to calculate the conversion between the Purchasing (supplier’s) unit of
measure code and the Base unit of measure code.

12. If you want to change this formula, select the Override Conversion check box.

13. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Add a Price Break

Use the Price Breaks sheet to establish price break information for the specified supplier. This information represents changes to the
base unit price specified for the part in the Parts > Detail sheet, based on quantity or volume purchases.

1. Click the Down Arrow next

to the New button; 1
select New Price Break.
6
2. Enter the Minimum
Quantity. This value specifies
the minimum purchase
quantity required to obtain the
related price. This value uses
the supplier’s unit of measure.
2 3
3. Enter the Days Out to specify
the number of days in which 4 5
these price breaks expire. The
application calculates the
Expiration Date based on this value.

4. Use the Price Modifier field to define the effective unit price for the price break. Depending on the Price Break Modifier you
selected on the Parts > Detail sheet, this value is either a flat amount or a percentage.

5. The Effective Price field displays the amount charged for a unit of the purchased part after the price break is applied.

6. Continue to add the price breaks you need. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

412 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

Add a Supplier Part

Use the Supplier Parts sheet to identify supplier parts and relate them to the qualified manufacturer’s and manufacturer’s part numbers
for this part. Single or multiple qualified manufacturer’s part numbers can be associated with a specified supplier part number. This
creates a link between your internal part number, approved supplier part source, and qualified manufacturer’s part numbers.

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 1
select New Supplier
Part. 9

2. Enter the Supplier Part and

Reference to specify the
supplier part number for the
supplier and any additional
reference information. 2 8

The Supplier Part is the 3

identification number your 4
supplier assigns and uses to
track this part number. Each 5
part can have multiple
6
supplier part numbers, if
desired. Parts can also be 7
assigned multiple qualified
manufacturers and
manufacturer’s parts. For
more information on part
cross reference functionality,
review the Part Cross
References section within
Chapter 17: Inventory Management.

3. Enter the Supplier Lead Time. This value specifies the number of days it generally takes to receive this supplier part from the
supplier after you send the purchase order.

4. Click the Manufacturer drop-down list and select the identity of the manufacturer for the specified supplier part number.

5. Click the Manufacturer Part drop-down list and select the manufacturer's part identification for the specified supplier part
number.

6. The Life Cycle field displays the current status of the part within its product life cycle. This status is defined within Qualified
Manufacturer Maintenance, and it displays here for your reference.

7. The Market Availability field displays information you can use as a lead time comparison for the purchased part from various
qualified manufacturers. A value of 45-60 days, for example, indicates this part is generally available for purchase during the next
45 to 60 days. This information is also entered within Qualified Manufacturer Maintenance, and it displays here for your
reference.

8. Select the Default for Purchases check box to indicate if multiple parts exist, the current multiple supplier parts exist, the
current supplier part is the default version used on purchase orders. However, you can override this value on a specific purchase
order.

9. Continue to add the supplier parts you need. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 413

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

Add a Supplier Part Restriction

Use the RoHS sheet to add a restriction on the use of certain hazardous substances that apply to this part. The RoHS values are added
to the part, not the supplier part.

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 1
select New Restriction.
8
2. Click the Restriction Type
drop-down list to select the
appropriate restriction type.

3. The default Description from

the selected restriction type
displays. 2
4. Select the Roll Up check box 3
to indicate an indirect roll-up 6
4
needs to be run to process
parts for compliance. 7
5

5. Select the Override check

box when a roll-up will not be
calculated for the current
substance restriction type.

6. The Compliance Date specifies the date on which the RoHS part compliance process will run. This date is automatically defined
after you click the Override check box.

7. The Last Roll Up field displays the date on which the compliance roll-up was previously run against this purchased part.

8. Continue to define the restrictions you need. When you finish, click Save on the You define substances and restriction types
Standard toolbar. through the Substance Maintenance and
Substance Restriction Type Maintenance
programs. For more information, review
the Epicor ERP Implementation Guide.
Add a Subcontract Part

Use the Subcontract Operations sheet to enter supplier pricing detail for subcontract services. For each subcontract part, you can
define price breaks and substance restrictions.

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 1
select New Subcontract
12
Part.

2. Click the Part button to find

and select the subcontract 11
part to add to the list. You
can also enter the part 2
directly.
3
3. Notice several fields are
identical to the fields on the 4
7
Parts > Detail sheet. Select 5 8
the Supplier UOM from the
drop-down list to specify the 6 9
unit of measure this supplier 10
uses for this subcontract part.

4. Click the Subcontract

Operation drop-down list and select the type of operation. You enter operations through Operation Maintenance, and all
operations entered through this program display on this drop-down list.

414 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

5. Enter the Effective date and the Expires date for the price. These values define the period during which this price list is
considered active by the application.

6. The application uses the Effective date and Expires date to calculate the number of Days this price list is active.

7. Enter the Base Unit Price for the part.

8. The Price Per value defines the quantity against which the Base Unit Price is calculated. Select an option from this drop-down
list. Available options:

• /1

• /100

• /1000

9. The Discount % specifies the overall discount allowed by this supplier. If you enter a value in this field, it further reduces the
price of the purchased parts.

10. You can also select a Price Break Modifier, either Flat Unit Price or Percent of Base, for the subcontract part. The selected
modifier determines the effective unit price for the related quantity.

11. Notice you can create price breaks and define RoHS restrictions for the subcontract part.

12. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Operations
This section details the operations available for the purchasing functionality. Each operation is described as a workflow to help guide
you through the process from start to finish. These programs are primarily found within the General Operations folder for the various
purchasing modules. If a unique setup record is required to run the operation, this record is also described in this section.

RFQ Entry
Use RFQ Entry to enter and print new Request for Quotes (RFQs) and to make changes to existing RFQs. Each RFQ contains detail lines
that define the part quantities and/or subcontracted operations you need for the requested parts. You can then send your RFQ to the
potential supplier.

If you use the consolidated purchasing functionality, your RFQ is sent to a central purchasing company as an RFQ suggestion where it
is processed and distributed to potential companies.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Supplier Relationship Management > General Operations > RFQ Entry

Create the RFQ

Do the following to create a request for quote record:

1. Click the Down Arrow next

to the New button; select
New RFQ. 1
2. The current Date displays. If
you need, you can select a
different date from the
calendar.
2
3. Click the Due Date drop-
3
down list to select the due
date by which you want to
complete the bidding on the
current RFQ.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 415

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

4. Click the Decision drop-

down list to select the date by
which you want to make
a decision about the 7
various supplier offers.

5. Click the Respond drop- 4

down list to select the date by
which you want all suppliers 5
to send in their quotes.
6
6. If you want this RFQ to
automatically print using the
Business Activity Management
functionality, select the Auto-
Print Ready check box. The
RFQ will automatically print
using the rules you defined
for the Business Activity
Management event. For more
information on this
functionality, review
application help or the Epicor
ICE Tools User Guide.

7. When you finish entering the header information, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Define the Part

You next must select the part or parts for which you are creating this RFQ. You create detail lines for each part you want to include on
the RFQ.

To add parts:

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 1
select New Line.

2. Click the Part button to find

and select the part you need.
You can also enter the part
number directly. 2 4
3. The part’s Description 3
automatically displays.
5
4. If you need to select a specific 6
revision, either click the Rev
button or use the drop-down 7
list to indicate the part
revision you need.

5. The Our UOM and Supplier

UOM drop-down lists display
the units of measure defined
for the purchased part. These
values default from the part
record, but if you need, you
can change them.

6. Select the Item Type for the RFQ detail line. Select Material for a part quantity and select Subcontract Operation for a
subcontract service.

7. Click the Operation drop-down list to select the operation for which this part or service is being purchased. All of the active
operations defined within Operation Maintenance display on this drop-down list.

416 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

Select the Suppliers

You next select the suppliers you want to compete over this request. You can select as many suppliers as you want.

To add suppliers to the current RFQ:

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 5
select New Supplier.

2. A new line displays within 1

the Request Quotes
From grid.

3. Click the Supplier Wizard

button to click through a 3 4
series of steps that help you
decide which supplier you
2
want to include on the RFQ.

4. You can also click the Add

button to find and select a
specific supplier for the detail
line.

5. Repeat these steps to place all

the suppliers you want on this
RFQ. When you finish, click
Save on the Standard
toolbar.

Define the Price Breaks

You need your suppliers to include the price breaks they will give you based on the quantities you may order. To do this, you use the
Quantities sheet.

1. Click the Down Arrow

4
next to the New button;
select New Quantity.

2. A new line displays within 1

the Quantities to print on
RFQ grid.

3. Enter the price break quantity

you want quoted within the
Quantity Break field.
2
4. Repeat these steps to enter
the price breaks you need. 3
When you finish, click Save
on the Standard toolbar.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 417

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

Create an Internet Auction

The RFQ functionality integrates with Epicor Sourcing, an internet web auction application. You can leverage this functionality to make
the current RFQ detail line available for online bidding from your suppliers.

Epicor Sourcing is a separate application you can purchase and install. When your company record (Company Configuration) is set up
to use this application, the sourcing functionality activates within RFQ Entry. Your buyers can use this application to open an RFQ detail
line for an online auction. Suppliers place bids against this detail line, and each bid must be smaller than the previous bid. The buyer
can then use Epicor Sourcing to decide which bid to accept.

To open this detail line for an online auction:

1. Click the Down Arrow next

to the New button; select 1
New Auction.

2. The ID (Short Description)

field displays the identifier for
the part. This value is pulled
from the part record and you 2
cannot change it. 3
3. Select the Listing Category 4
option you want to use with
5
this auction. Listing categories
define the type of part you 6
are opening up for bids. You
7
define these categories within
the Resource Allocation 8
program and then indicate
the categories you will use 9
within the Epicor Sourcing
application.

4. The Item Description field displays the concise explanation for the part. This value is pulled from the part record and you
cannot change it.

5. The Event Type field displays the Reverse English Auction type; currently, this is the only type Epicor Sourcing accepts. During
a Reverse English Auction, bidders enter bids using descending price values, which means the next bid must be less than the
previous bid. Each bid value must also decrease by at least as much as the Minimum Offer Decrement, or the bid is not
accepted by Epicor Sourcing.

6. Suppliers can only enter bids while the online auction is active. You define the day on which an online auction accepts bids
within the Starting Date field. When the system clock passes the day defined within the Starting Date field, suppliers can place
their bids.

7. You can give your suppliers time to prepare for their bid by entering values within the Preview Date and Duration fields. Use
these two values to display the online auction as a preview. No bidding can be placed against the auction while in this mode.
When the system clock passes the hour value defined on the Duration field, the preview closes.

8. Define the Minimum Offer Decrement you require for this auction. Each subsequent bid must use a value that is at least less
than this amount, or the bid is not accepted by Epicor Sourcing.

9. Select a Bid Anonymity option to determine how much information displays online through Epicor Sourcing. Available options:

• Bids and Bidders Visible - Causes all the supplier identifiers, names, and bid amounts to display within Epicor Sourcing.
Suppliers can then review the competing bids and who placed them.

• Bidder ID Concealed - Causes the bid amounts to display, but hides the supplier identifiers and names. Suppliers can then
only review the prices of the competing bids.

418 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

10. When you finish defining the

auction, click Save on the 10
Standard toolbar.

11. You are now ready to send the 11

auction to Epicor Sourcing. To
do this, click the Actions
menu. 12

12. Highlight the RFQ Line 13

submenu and select Send to
Sourcing. The current auction
for the detail line is now
uploaded to Epicor Sourcing.
This command moves the
record to the sourcing
application; it is not available
for public viewing.

13. When you are ready to accept bids, click the Actions menu again. Highlight the RFQ Line submenu and select Post to
Sourcing. The online auction displays using the Preview Date and Starting Date you specified on the auction record.

Supplier Responses
Use the Supplier Responses program to enter and track responses from suppliers to a request for quote (RFQ) record. Each supplier
response consists of a price or a list of prices for the part or service operation defined on the RFQ detail line. You can then save these
price values to a supplier list. You can also accept the price and turn the supplier response into a purchase order.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Supplier Relationship Management > General Operations > Supplier Responses

To incorporate supplier responses into a price list:

1. Click the Responses button

to find and select the RFQ for
which you received a
response.

2. The RFQ displays within the 1

RFQ Listing grid.

3. Click the Responses button 2

to find and select the
response value you need. You 3
can also enter the responses
value directly. Available
options:

• Waiting - The default

response for a RFQ line for
which you have not yet
entered a response.

• Not Waiting - Use this response if you have received a response from the supplier, but you do not want to enter it into the
program.

• Close Line - Use this response if you have received a response from the supplier, but you do not want to enter it into the
program, or if the supplier is not going to send a response.

• Received - This response is generated by the program when you enter supplier pricing information. You cannot manually
enter this response; it displays automatically.

• Accepted - You can manually change a RFQ line with a current response of Received to this response. This response means
that you have decided to accept the supplier’s pricing, and your job or quote will update with the pricing information.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 419

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

4. You can enter responses by

clicking the Add Supplier
Responses button. 5

5. You can also click the

Actions menu and select
Add Supplier Part and 6
Prices. Supplier Price List
Maintenance launches, 4
displaying the supplier
defined on the selected RFQ
line. You can then update this
supplier’s price list with the
part and prices from the
current response.

6. To immediately create a purchase order from the RFQ detail line, click the Create PO button. You can also click the Actions
menu and select Create PO. Purchase Order Entry launches and information from this RFQ detail line populates the equivalent
fields on the new purchase order.

Purchase Order Entry

Purchase Order Entry is used to enter and print new purchase orders and to make changes to existing purchase orders.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > General Operations > Purchase Order Entry

New Purchase Orders

To enter a new purchase order:

1. Click New on the 1

Standard toolbar.

2. On the Summary sheet, 6 5

the PO Number defaults to 2
0. When the PO is first saved, 3
the purchase order number is
assigned automatically. 4

3. The purchase order Type

defaults to Standard. The
type determines if the
resulting material and
financial transactions reflect a
buy-sell or transfer
relationship. Other purchase
order Type options:

• Customer Managed - Select this option if the material purchased is inventory you are storing on behalf of a customer.
Customer-managed items can be used in the production of products for this customer, or they may be shipped by you directly
to your customer’s customer. Although you are storing the inventory, your company never legally owns these part quantities.

• Supplier Managed - Select this option if the material purchased is inventory you are storing as consignment inventory from
the supplier. You can also use these part quantities on jobs; once you consume this inventory on a job, your company legally
owns it.

4. The PO Date defaults to today’s date. You can change this date if you need.

5. Click the Supplier button to find and select the Supplier ID. You can also enter the Supplier ID directly.

6. Click Save.

420 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

Purchase Orders - Lines

To enter purchase order lines:

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 1
select New Line.
12
2. Navigate to the Lines > 2
Detail sheet. 3

3. In the Buy For section, select

the appropriate option –
either Inventory, Other, Job
Material, or Subcontract 4
5 6
Operation. If you assign
more than one release to a 7
8
purchase order line, the Buy 9
For selection set for the line is
disabled and set to Inventory. 11 10
You can change this setting
for individual shipping
releases of each line on the
Releases > Detail sheet. You
can also change the purpose
of the purchase during the
receipt of the purchase order
line or release.

4. In the Part/Rev field, enter

the part number you are
purchasing.

5. In the Our Qty field, enter the quantity as it is stored within your inventory.

6. If you need, you can change the Unit of Measure (Our Quantity) used with the part. In this example, EA displays, designating
the Each unit of measure.

7. Once you enter a quantity in the Our Qty field, the Supplier Qty automatically calculates.

8. If you click the Supplier Qty radio button, the Supplier Qty and Unit of Measure (Supplier Quantity) fields activate. Use this
function when you need to modify the quantity to reflect supplier values for the part. When you change a value here, the Our
Qty field updates using the conversion factor defined on the supplier price list.

9. Enter the Unit Price. If a unit price value is defined on the supplier price list, this value populates the field by default.

10. If this purchase order detail line is subject to Use Tax, select the Taxable check box. This type of tax is levied in the United States.
This internal corporate tax is self-assessed when a product is purchased by a resident of the state that issues the tax. It does not
affect the invoice total, but it does affect the general ledger. Use tax strictly accounts for storage and consumption of goods used
internally by the company in a specific state (not for resale). For more information about use taxes, review the Global Tax Engine
chapter in the Epicor ERP Implementation Guide.

11. If you want to update both Our Qty and Supplier Qty values manually, select the Override Conversion check box. This activates
both fields; directly enter the values you need. The conversion formula is not run against either value, so the values you enter are
not changed by the application.

12. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 421

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

13. Notice the Totals section

updates with the current cost
of the detail line.

14. If this part has a

manufacturer’s part cross
reference, select the
organization you need from
the Manufacturer drop-
down list.

15. Click the Manufacturer Part

drop-down list to select the
reference this manufacturer 14
uses for this part. For more 15
information about creating
part cross references for your
purchased parts, review the
Part Cross References section 13
within Chapter 17: Inventory
Management.

16. Optionally, you can click the

Price Breaks button to
launch Supplier Price List
16 17 20
Maintenance. Use this
program to enter or update
price breaks for the part number on the purchase order line.

17. If you want to review your purchasing history for this part, click the Purchase Advisor button.

18. Use the Purchase

Advisor program to 18
review useful information 19
about the part on the
purchase order line. It
provides answers to the
questions: Have I purchased it
before?, Do I have any on
order?, Do I have any on
hand?, Do I have approved
suppliers?, Do I have supplier
price lists?, Do I have
compliant suppliers?, or Do I
have compliant parts?

19. When you finish reviewing your purchase history, click the Close button. You return to the Purchase Order Entry > Detail
sheet.

20. To review the part cross references for the current purchased part, click the Cross Reference Options button.

21. The Part Cross Reference Options window 21

displays.
22
22. Use this window to indicate how you want
Manufacturer, Supplier, and Substitute part cross
references to print on the purchase order. Identical options
are available on all drop-down lists; you can print the
selected reference, all references, or no references. 23

23. Click OK to close this window.

422 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

Purchase Orders – Inspection Plans

You can verify purchased quantities meet quality standards through the Quality Assurance functionality. As part quantities are received,
inspectors can review them and record any nonconformance quantities using the programs available within the Quality Assurance
module.

The purchasing functionality also interacts with the Enhanced Quality Assurance module so inspectors can evaluate part quantities
using specifications and inspection plans. You can define both part specifications and multiple inspection plans for each purchased
part. Your inspectors can then select and use a specification and inspection plan to evaluate received part quantities.

To set up an inspection plan for a detail line:

1. Select the Inspection

Required check box to
indicate the parts specified on
this purchase order line
must be inspected when 2
you receive them at your
shipping location. When you
enter a receipt for this line,
parts are automatically
received into Inspection. If this
check box is selected on
either the part class or
supplier record linked to this
purchase order, this check box
is automatically selected and
cannot be changed.

2. You can now link this detail

line to an inspection plan. 1
Click the Down Arrow next
to the New button; select
New Inspection.

3. The Lines > Inspection >

Detail sheet displays. 8

4. Click the Inspection Plan

button to find and select the
inspection plan you want to 3
link to this purchase order
detail line.
5
5. Select the plan Revision that 4
applies to this part from the 7
drop-down list. 6
6. Click the Specification ID
button to find and select a
specification for this purchase
order detail line.

7. Now define the specification

revision you need from the
Revision drop-down list.

8. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

You create inspection plans and part specifications within the Enhanced Quality Assurance module. To learn more about this
functionality, review Chapter 16: Quality Assurance.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 423

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

Purchase Order - Releases

To enter purchase order releases:

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 1
select New Release.
17 9
2. The Release field displays the
2
number of the current
release.

3. The Buy For section indicates 3 5

why this part quantity is being
4 8
purchased – for Inventory,
Other, Job Material, or 6 10
Subcontract Operation. You
select this value on the Lines 7
> Detail sheet.
12
11
4. If either the Material or the
Subcontract Operation option
is selected in the Buy For
section, the Job field is active. 13 14
This indicates you are
purchasing materials for a job
15
or a subcontract operation.
Either enter the job number
16
directly or click the Job
button to find and select this
record.

5. When you enter the job number, the Asm and Mtl fields activate. You can now enter the appropriate job assembly number or
the appropriate material sequence number in these respective fields.

6. If this purchase order line is for a sales order release selected as a drop shipment, use the Sales Order field to define the specific
sales order release you want to link to this purchase order release. To do this, either enter the sales order directly or click the
Sales Order button to find and select this record. You can also use this field to enter additional Buy To Order sales releases to
the current purchase order line. Use the Line/Release fields to enter the specific detail line and release from the sales order.

7. When you save the release, the application links the sales order release to the Buy To Order purchase order line. The Sold To,
Ship To Cust, and Ship To fields display customer information from the selected sales order. The fields respectively display the
customer to whom you sold the parts, the ship to customer who is receiving the parts, and the identifier for the ship to location.

8. If this release is a drop shipment to be sent directly from your supplier to your customer, the Drop Ship check box is selected.

9. You can view the drop ship address by clicking the Drop Ship Address tab.

10. If this release is being sent to a location that is not one of the customer’s ship to locations, the One Time check box is selected.

11. The Date/Quantity section displays specific information about the Due Date, Promise Date, and quantities for this purchase
order release.

12. The Plant/Warehouse section displays information about the plant and warehouse involved in this purchase order release
transaction.

13. If this purchase is for a customer with whom you are storing inventory quantities, click the Managed Customer button to find
and select this customer record. You then receive this part quantity using 3PL (Third Party Logistics) processing.

14. If this purchase order release is part of a larger project, click the Project button to find and select the specific project you need.
To learn more about projects, review Chapter 8: Project Management.

424 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

15. The G/L Account section displays the Book, Account, and Description values. These values indicate the account number and
the GL book to which you eventually post this transaction. For details about this feature, review Chapter 25: Consolidation and
the General Ledger.

16. The Container ID value defines the container used to receive this part quantity. The status of the shipment displays next to this
field. In this example, the part quantity is not yet sent, so the Not Shipped icon displays.

17. When you finish the purchase order release, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Purchase Order - Miscellaneous Charges

You can add miscellaneous charges to a purchase order header, or to a specific purchase order line. To add miscellaneous charges to a
purchase order line:

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 1
select New Line Misc
Charge. 6
2
2. The Lines > Miscellaneous
Charges sheet displays.

3. Select a charge from the

Charge ID drop-down list. 3 4 5
You create these charges in
Miscellaneous
Charge/Credit
Maintenance.

4. Enter the Amount you need for the miscellaneous charge.

5. Select the Taxable check box to indicate this miscellaneous charge is subject to sales tax.

6. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Submit for Approval

Once the purchase order lines are complete, you are ready to submit this purchase order for approval. To indicate a purchase order is
ready to approve:

1. Navigate to the Summary sheet.

2. Select the Unapproved check box.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 425

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

3. The indicator changes to

Approved.

4. If the buyer on the purchase

order has exceeded the
purchase limit, however, a
dialog box displays stating the
purchase order must be
approved by the person 3
selected as the authorized
approver for this buyer. Click
OK to close this message.

5. In this case, Pending now displays instead of the Approved

status indicator. If any purchase orders are pending, they must
first be approved before they can be printed.

6. The individual defined as the Approval Person in Buyer

Maintenance (discussed previously in this chapter) is required to 6
approve any pending purchase orders. The approver, in this example
Henry Crabtree, must then log into the application and launch
Purchase Order Entry. To approve a pending purchase order, from the
Actions menu, select Approvals.

426 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

7. The PO Approval Activity program displays. This

program lists any purchase orders pending 7
approval. The approver can manually select the
purchase orders to approve.

8. Click OK to approve those purchase orders.

9. If the buyer’s limit was not exceeded, or once the approver

approves a purchase order, the purchase order is now
approved and is ready to be printed.

10. To print the purchase order, from the Actions menu, select Print.

10

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 427

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

Consolidated Purchase Orders

If your organization has the Multi-Site Management license, you can create consolidated purchase orders. These purchase orders
control purchases for separate companies and plants across your organization. Through this feature, you indicate which company can
receive various quantities and services on the consolidated purchase order. You indicate the specific company, plant and warehouse on
each purchase order release.

To create a consolidated purchase order:

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 1
select New Consolidated
PO.
3
2. Notice the Global PO check
box is selected, indicating this
purchase order will be used
for consolidated purchasing.

3. Click the Supplier button to

find and select the supplier 2 4
who will fulfill this purchase
order. The supplier record you
select must be defined as a
Global supplier available for
consolidated purchasing. You
activate this functionality
within Supplier Maintenance;
review this section earlier in
this chapter for details.

4. Select the Buyer responsible

for handling this purchase order. Just like the supplier record, the buyer record must also be defined as able to make
consolidated purchases. You likewise activate this functionality within Buyer Maintenance; review this section earlier in this
chapter for more information.

5. Define the other header

information as you need. 5
When you are ready to
create detail lines, click the
Down Arrow next to the
New button; select New
Line.

6. Click the Part/Rev button to

find and select the part you
are purchasing. You can also
enter the part directly. You
must select a global part 6 7
available for consolidated
purchasing. You activate this
functionality within Part
Maintenance; review this
section earlier in this chapter
for details.

7. In the Quantity/Cost section,

enter the total quantity values
you need for the detail line
and any other information
you need.

428 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

8. You can now create the

purchase order releases 8
you need for each
company that will receive 13
quantities from this
purchase order. To do this,
click the Down Arrow next
to the New button; select
New Release.

9. Enter the Quantity you want

on this release.

10. You can create a new release 10

for a specific global company, 11
and even define the plant and 9
warehouse that will receive 12
this quantity. To do this, click
the Global Company drop-
down list and select the
global company that will
receive the quantity.

11. To indicate the part quantity

will go to a plant within this
company, click the Global
Plant drop-down list and
select an option.

12. You can also indicate a specific global warehouse will receive this quantity. Click the Warehouse drop-down list to select the
warehouse you need.

13. Continue to add the releases you need for other companies within your organization. When you finish, click Save on the
Standard toolbar.

The part quantities the multiple companies receive for this consolidated purchase To learn how to set up and run the various
order can now be recorded. multi-company features, review the Multi-Site
Technical Reference Guide within application help.

Contract Purchase Orders

You use purchase contracts to buy inventory quantities through a recurring schedule. You can establish delivery schedules to regularly
re-issue material against which recurring deliveries are made. This functionality is available if your company uses the Purchase
Contracts Management module.

For example, if you need a quantity of Part ABC to be purchased monthly, you do not need to enter a separate purchase order each
month. Instead, you can set up a contract purchase order schedule and maintain this record automatically. You can assign contract line
items to purchase orders. These line items automate delivery schedules with delivery dates, prices, and corresponding quantities.

To create a contract purchase order:

1. Click the Down Arrow next

to the New button; select
New Contract PO.
1
2
2. Click the Supplier button to
find and select the supplier
for the purchase order. You
can also enter the Supplier ID
directly.

3. Notice the Contract PO

check box is selected.
3 4

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 429

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

4. You need to define the length of the recurring contract. Enter Start Date and End Date values. This contract purchase order will
be active between the dates you enter in these fields.

5. Continue to select and

enter the header 5
information you need.
When you are ready to 12
add detail lines, click the
Down Arrow next to the
New button; select New
Line.

6. Click the Part/Rev button to

find and select a part. This 6
part must be linked to a part
schedule that defines how
often you want to receive
quantities from this supplier.
This supplier must also be
approved for distributing this
part.

You create part

schedules within Part 8 9 10
Schedule Maintenance. 7
This setup program is
available within the
Purchase Contracts 11
Management module.

7. In the Contract Qty field, enter the total part quantity you want to receive.

8. Notice you can also select a different unit of measure for this quantity.

9. Enter the Contract Price for each unit of the purchased part.

10. You can also select a different Price Per value. Available options:

• /1 (Each)

• /100

• /1000

11. Select the Contract Active check box to indicate you want to receive quantities through this contract purchase order.

12. Continue to add detail lines and releases as you need. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Purchase Order Suggestions

The Generate Suggestions program automatically creates a list of suggested purchases based on time-phased information. You can
then create actual purchase orders from these suggestions in Purchase Order Entry.

The Generate Suggestions program builds suggestions from two places - time-phased information and requisitions marked as Send To
Purchasing. For time-phased purchase orders, the program deletes and rebuilds some or all time-phased purchase orders as is
appropriate for the date when suggestions are generated and for the selected processing option.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > General Operations > Generate Suggestions

430 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

Generate Purchase Order Suggestions

Here’s how:

1. Select the Net Change or Regenerative processing

option. The Net Change option only updates purchase 5
order suggestions that occurred since the last time the
process was run. The Regenerative option deletes all
of the existing purchase order suggestions and
generates new records based on the current state of
the database.
1
2. Enter a Cutoff Date. Any time-phased records that
occur on or before this date are turned into purchase 2
order suggestions. 3
3. If you want multi-company purchasing suggestions to
4
generate, select the Run Consolidated Purch check
box. Use this option to review and process purchase
order suggestions from other companies. This check
box is available if you are logged into the central
purchasing company. You can run a full regeneration
on your consolidated purchase orders if your
organization has a Multi-Site Management license.

4. If you want to generate purchase order suggestions for purchase contracts, select the Include Purchase Contract Items check
box. This check box is available if your organization uses the Purchase Contracts Management module.

5. Click the Process button on the Standard toolbar.

Review Purchase Order Suggestions

You are now ready to review the new purchase order suggestions that were generated. You do this in the New PO Suggestions
program.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > General Operations > New PO Suggestions

To review the generated purchase order suggestions:

1. Click Search on the

Standard toolbar to retrieve
the list of suggestions.

2. The New Purchase Order 1

Suggestion Search program
opens. Click the Search 2
button. The buyer can limit
the search by defining both a
buyer and a cutoff date.

3. To select all the records that

display, click the Select All
button.

4. Click OK.

4 3

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 431

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

5. Select the Buy check box for

each suggestion that you
want to create a purchase
order.

6. When you finish selecting the

desired suggestions, from the 6
Actions menu, select
Generate Purchase Orders.

7. In the window that displays,

click Yes to confirm the
action. Suggestions selected
as Buy are now removed from
the list and new purchase
orders for those suggestions
are created. The updated
records display on the Tree
View.

432 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

Review New Purchase Orders

You can review these newly created purchase orders in Purchase Order Entry or by running the Open Purchase Orders report.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > Reports > Open Purchase Orders

1. Enter the From and To dates

to determine the report date
parameters.

2. Specify if you want Supplier

Managed or Customer 5
Managed inventory
information included in the
report.

3. Specify if you want Supplier 1

Part or Manufacturer Part
cross reference information
included in the report.

4. Optionally, enter Filter

Summary criteria.
3
5. When you finish, click Print 2
on the Standard toolbar to
print the report.
4

Inter-Company Purchase Orders

If your organization has installed the Multi-Site Management license, you can use the inter-company trading functionality to create
supplier-customer relationships between companies within your organization. You do this by setting up your companies as customer
and supplier records, and then linking them through external company records. You can then create Inter-company purchase orders
(ICPOs) between multiple companies within your database.

You can create ICPOs and suggestions that originate in a customer company and are received automatically by a supplier company.
The supplier company can either send purchase suggestions back to the customer company, or convert the ICPO into a sales order for
processing and fulfillment. They then fulfill this demand by selling and shipping the item back to the customer company.

The two (or multiple) companies must use the Epicor application and be set up for inter-company trading; they can then send ICPO
suggestions to each other. As long as the purchase order suggestions were created in the application and sent electronically, you can
automatically generate sales orders from the resulting ICPOs.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 433

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

Sales Company – Manufacturing Company Scenario

You have a Sales company that sells a manufactured item to an end user (external customer), and another internal company that
actually manufactures the item being resold. This Manufacturing company is a supplier to the Sales company; it receives an ICPO from
the Sales company, which is a “customer” of the Manufacturing company. When this happens, the Manufacturing company generates
a sales order. This company now can fulfill the demand by manufacturing the item, and then sells/ships it to the Sales company, which
in turn resells the item to an end user (external customer).

In this scenario you set up the Sales company as the customer and the Manufacturing company as the supplier. Within the customer
company, you enter a standard sales order in Sales Order Entry and generate purchase order suggestions. You then convert the
purchase order suggestions into a new purchase order for purchase of the manufactured item from the Manufacturing (supplier)
company. Now in the Manufacturing (supplier) company, a new sales order is created using the ICPO suggestions automatically
received from the Sales (customer) company. Using this sales order, the Manufacturing (supplier) company manufactures and fulfills the
order as requested, ships the completed quantity back the Sales (customer) company, and then generate an invoice for it once it has
been received.

Inter-Company Setup
To set up inter-company trading, you need to create purchase terms, customer, supplier, and external company records that define the
relationship between the companies.

Purchase Terms

In each company, create identical purchase and selling terms using Purchase Terms Maintenance. Purchase terms are assigned to the
supplier record you define for the supplier company, They specify the frequency, number of payments, and discounts applied to
invoices generated by the Manufacturing (supplier) company to bill the Sales (customer) company for items it receives from the
supplier company.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Purchase Terms

To set up inter-company purchase terms:

1. Click the Down Arrow next to
the New button; select New 1
Purchasing Term.
7
2. Enter a unique identifier for the
purchase terms into the Code
field.
2
3. In the Number of Payments
field, specify how many payments 3
can be made for any invoice
assigned these purchasing 4
payment terms. The application
uses the number of payments in 5
conjunction with the Number of
Days field to create a default
payment schedule for any invoices
assigned these terms.

4. In the Terms Type drop-down list,

select the type of terms being 6
defined. Valid selections are Days,
Days of month, and End of x-
Month + y Days.
For more information, review
5. In the Due section, define the specific discount parameters appropriate to the terms type Chapter 21: Suppliers and
you selected in the Terms Type drop-down list. Accounts Payable chapter in the
Application Guide or the Purchase
Terms topics in the application
help.

434 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

6. Click the Discount Type drop-down list to select the discount terms type for an invoice.

Available options: Days, Days of month, and End of x-Month + y Days.

7. When you finish, click Save.

Supplier Maintenance

You create supplier records for the internal companies from whom the current company receives materials and services. If the current
company will purchase goods from other companies, you must create a supplier record in this company. Continuing the previous
example, you create supplier records for the Sales and Manufacturing companies in both companies to establish the ICPO relationship.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Supplier

To create a supplier:

1. Click the Down Arrow next to

the New button; select New 1
Supplier.
8
9
2. In the Supplier field, enter an
identifier for the partner company.

3. In the Name field, enter the name 2

of the partner company. For
example, in the Sales company, 3 4
you would enter the name of the
manufacturing company when
defining its supplier record.

4. Select the IC Trader check box to

indicate this supplier’s transactions
are available for inter-company
trading. This designates that the 5
supplier identifier can selected on 6
purchase order transactions moved
between multiple companies. This 7
option is only available if you use
the External System Integration
tools in the Epicor application.

5. Click the Group drop-down list

and select Intercompany. This
designates that the supplier record
is being used in multi-company ICPO processing.

6. Click the Terms drop-down list to select the purchase terms you defined in Purchase Term Maintenance for this multi-company
relationship.

7. Click the FOB drop-down list to define the Free on Board (FOB) point for goods being shipped to the partner company. It
indicates the point at which title of the shipped goods changes from the supplier company to the customer company.

8. In the remaining sheets, enter supplier information as required for the partner company.

9. When you finish, click Save.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 435

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

Customer Maintenance

Create customer records in Customer Maintenance for the companies with whom the current company will do trades. You must also
create a customer record for the current company as well if the current company will purchase goods from other companies.
Continuing the Sales and Manufacturing companies scenario, you create a customer record in the Sales company for both the partner
Manufacturing company, as well as for the Sales company itself. Conversely, in the Manufacturing company, you create a customer
record for the partner Sales company in the Sales company, as well as for the Manufacturing company itself.

Main Menu Path: Order Management > Sales Management > Setup > Customer

To enter a customer:

1. Click the Down Arrow next

1
to the New button; select
New Customer. 2 7
2. In the Customer field, enter an
identifier for the partner company.
3
3. Enter the name of the partner
4
company into the Name field. For
example, in the Sales company, 5 6
you would enter the name of the
manufacturing company when
defining its customer record.

4. Click the Type drop-down list and

select Customer.

5. Select the IC Trader check box to

indicate this customer’s
transactions are available for inter-
company trading; this designates
the customer identifier can
selected on order transactions
moved between multiple
companies. This option is only
available if you use the External
System Integration tools.

6. In the remaining sheets, enter customer information as required for the partner company.

7. When you finish, click Save.

External Company Setup

You can establish either direct integration between
Once you have defined purchase terms, supplier records and customer companies that reside on the same database or Sonic
records, you must complete setup of all required external company records integration between companies that reside on
that support multi-company processing in the application. This section separate databases. Documenting these setup
briefly describes these programs. methods is beyond the scope of this guide. To learn
how to establish direct or Sonic integrations, review
the Multi-Site Technical Reference Guide within the
• External Company Maintenance application help.

Use External Company Maintenance to either establish direct relationships with companies within the same database or create
remote connections to companies on other databases. You create external company records to pass data to and from the current
company to an external company. In a multi-company environment, for example, you can create an external company so that
you can share global customer, part, supplier and financial data with the external company.

You can define the specific types of interactions you want to occur between the two companies - like sending customer data,
supplier data, PO suggestions, and so on for each record. You also set up the Inter-Company Trading functionality in this
program, defining the suppliers and customers involved in this trading relationship.

Main Menu Path: System Management > External System Integration > Setup > External Company Maintenance

436 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

• External System Maintenance

Use External System Maintenance to add or update the integration records you use to transfer data between multiple companies
within your database.

Main Menu Path: System Management > External System Integration > Setup > External System Maintenance

• Integrated Table Workbench

Use Integrated Table Workbench when an incoming record is not complete or contains some other error. Rather than update the
record in the other system and re-run a process, you can reconcile the discrepancy within the Integrated Table Workbench.

Main Menu Path: System Management > External System Integration > General Operations > External Integrated
Table Workbench

Inter-Company Purchase Order Processing

You now use Sales Order Entry and Purchase Order entry to create, generate, and modify inter-company purchase orders and
suggestions.

Sales (Customer) Company - Enter Sales Order

The Sales (customer) company sells an item to an external customer manufactured by the Manufacturing (supplier) company. In the
Sales company, you enter a standard sales order, designate the Buy To Order supplier, and generate purchase order suggestions.

Main Menu Path: Order Management > Sales Management > General Operations > Order Entry

1. Use the Summary sheet to create

1
a new order and the Lines >
Detail sheet to create a detail 4
line for the part quantity that
will be produced in the
Manufacturing company.

2. In the Releases > Detail sheet,

select the Buy To Order check
box. 2

3. Click the Supplier button to find

and select the supplier record
(defined in Supplier Maintenance)
for the company manufacturing
the part quantity.

4. When you finish, click Save.

For more information on

entering a sales order,
review Chapter 5: Sales 3
Order Processing.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 437

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

Sales (Customer) Company – Generate Purchase Order Suggestions

You next generate purchase order suggestions for the sales order and convert them into a new purchase order. The Sales (customer)
company can then purchase the part quantity from the Manufacturing (supplier) company.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > General Operations > Generate Suggestions

1. Run the Generate PO Suggestions process to 1

generate PO suggestion records.

2. Use the Processing Options to indicate how the

3
purchase suggestions will generate. Available options:

• Regeneration - Remove all the current suggestions,

recreate them, and add new suggestions. This 2
option takes more time to process.

• Net Change - Only generate suggestions for purchase

requests not generated the last time this process was
run. The default option, this method requires less
processing time.

3. Click the Processing icon on the standard toolbar.

Sales (Customer) Company – Create Purchase Order from Purchase Order Suggestions

Once you have generated purchase order suggestions from the sales order, you can convert them to a purchase order you use to
purchase the manufactured item from the Manufacturing (supplier) company. When you generate the purchase order, the application
also generates ICPO suggestion records and sends them to the Manufacturing (supplier) company.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > General Operations > New Suggestions

1. Click the Binocular Search to find

the purchase order suggestions. 1

2. The supplier identifier and name of

the Manufacturing (supplier)
company display in the Supplier
field. 2

3. Select the Buy check box to

specify you want to create a
purchase order for the purchase
order suggestions.

4. From the Actions menu, select Generate Purchase Orders.

4

438 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

5. When Purchase Order Suggestion displayes, select Generate

Orders for Current Buyer, then click OK.

6. To the Continue with Generate? message, click Yes.

6
The resulting purchase order can be viewed and modified as necessary in Purchase Order Entry.

Manufacturing (Supplier) Company – Generate Sales Order from ICPOs

Now through the multi-company functionality, the inter-company purchase order is sent to the receiving Manufacturing (supplier)
company. In the Manufacturing company, you create a new sales order from the ICPO suggestions. The Manufacturing company can
now begin fulfilling the sales order, and can also handle future changes requested by the Sales company.

To covert an ICPO suggestion into a sales order:

1. In the Manufacturing (supplier) company, navigate to Sales Order Entry. From

the Actions menu, select Incoming to Linked ICPO Suggestions.

2. When Incoming ICPO

Suggestions program 4
2
displays, in the supplier
company review the
suggestions.

3. To convert an ICPO
suggestion into a sales order,
3
select the Ready for Order
check box.

4. To finish accepting and

rejecting the ICPO
suggestions, from the
Actions menu, select Process
All Suggestions.

Manufacturing (Supplier) Company – Modify Inter-Company Purchase Orders

To make changes to the sales order and modify inter-company purchase orders as needed.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 439

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

Main Menu Path: Order Management > Sales Management > General Operations > Order Entry

1. To make changes to the sales order, from the Actions menu, select
Suggestions to Linked PO.

2. When the Send Inter- 5

4
Company PO Suggestions
program displays, click the
Sales Order button to find
the sales order linked to an
ICPO. 2

3. You can make specific

changes to the sales order.
For example you can change
the Order Quantity to reflect
a new demand requirement.

4. When you finish, click Save.

5. To send the suggestion to

the customer (Sales) company,
from the Actions menu, 3
select Send All Suggestions.

The application sends the suggestions to the Sales (customer) company that originally sent the inter-company purchase order. As the
suggestions are sent for the sales order created from the original ICPO, the application automatically updates the inter-company
purchase order record with this information.

Sales (Customer) Company – Accept Purchase Order Suggestions

After the Manufacturing company makes changes to the sales order generated from ICPO suggestions, the Sales (customer) company
can review the suggestions, accept them, or reply with further changes.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > General Operations > Purchased Order Entry

1. In Purchase Order Entry, from the Actions menu, select Change PO Suggestions.
1

2. Click the Binocular search

button to find the purchase 2
order suggestion.
3
3. For each suggestion, you can
make changes and then
accept the suggestion.
Available change options:

• Cancel - Ignores the

suggestion.

• Expedite - Requests
activity be initiated on the
ICPO suggestion sooner
than originally planned.

• Increase - Adds more

4 5 6
quantity to the suggestion.

440 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

• Postpone - Delays the suggestion for a time.

• Reduce - Subtracts quantity from the suggestion.

4. Besides making changes to the overall suggestion, you can change or cancel a specific detail line. To do this click the Edit PO
Line button and make the changes needed in the window that displays.

5. Likewise, you can make changes to suggested release by clicking the Edit PO If the related order release is not linked
Release button. to a job record, the application voids
the order release. However, if the
6. To complete the purchase order change, click the Accept button. You can also click related order release is linked to a job,
the Actions menu and select Accept. the application sets the order release
quantity to zero, and creates a
The Manufacturing (supplier) company automatically receives the change and the manufacturing suggestion for the
application updates the linked sales order with the new purchasing information. related job record.

Manufacturing (Supplier) Company - Process the Sales Order

Once demand for the sales order is fulfilled by the Manufacturing (supplier) company, you are ready to ship the order to the Sales
(customer) company.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping/Receiving > General Operations > Customer Shipment Entry

1. In Customer Shipment
Entry, in the Pack ID 5
field, enter the packing
identifier number associated 2 4
with the shipment.
1
2. Record the shipmet quantities
in the Lines > Detail sheet.

3. To print a packing slip, shipping labels, or both documents, from the Actions
menu, select Print.

4. After printing the packing slip or shipping labels, select the Shipped check box. 3
5. Click Save.

After you save the record, the application automatically creates and sends a shipment
record to the Sales (customer) company.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 441

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

Sales (Customer) Company - Receive Completed Items from Manufacturing (Supplier) Company

Within the Sales (customer) company, launch Receipt Entry to record the receipt of the quantity from the Manufacturing (supplier)
company.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping/Receiving > General Operations > Receipt Entry

1. From the Actions menu, select Add Intercompany Receipt.

1

2. When the Add Intercompany Receipt

window displays, select the supplier and
intercompany receipt. The Epicor 2
application retrieves the corresponding
purchase order and automatically closes it.

Manufacturing (Supplier) Company – Invoice Items Sold to Sales (Customer) Company

Once the shipped items are received, the Manufacturing (supplier) company can generate an AR invoice and bill the Sales (customer)
company for the item.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > General Operations > Invoice Entry

To generate an AR invoice and bill the Sales (customer) company for the item:

1. In AR Invoice Entry, from the Actions menu, select Get >

Shipments. 1

2. The Get Shipments window

appears. First, select the plant
from which you want to generate
the invoices. You can select the 2
Current Plant or All Plants.
3
3. Indicate the customer
shipments for which you want to
generate the invoices. You can
generate invoices for all customers
or click the Customers button to
select specific customers.

4. Click the Select All, Manual

Selection, and Drop Shipments
buttons to select the specific
shipments from which you will
generate invoices.

442 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

5. Complete the invoice in AR Invoice Entry. Use this 5

program to enter any final changes on the invoice. 6

6. To determine the taxes, from the Actions menu, highlight

Group, and select Calculate All Taxes.

7. To post the invoice, from the Actions menu, highlight Group,

and select Post. 7

The invoice is then posted by the Manufacturing (supplier)

company. When the Sales (customer) company receives the AR invoice, the Sales company pays the Manufacturing company for
the purchased quantity.

Buyer Workbench
The Buyer Workbench is a centralized tool you can use to both generate and manage request for quotes (RFQs) and purchase orders
(POs). Through this program, you can select a specific buyer and view a summary of the RFQs and POs assigned to this buyer. The
information includes the number of RFQ and purchase order records open, overdue, scheduled for today, scheduled for this week, and
scheduled for beyond this week (future).

The Buyer Workbench also displays the number of RFQs that have received responses from suppliers and are ready for processing, as
well as the number of purchase orders that require the current buyer’s approval.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Supplier Relationship Management > General Operations > Buyer Workbench

To review the RFQs and POs for a specific buyer:

1. Click the Buyer button to

find and select a specific
buyer to review. Typically, you
will select your buyer record.

2. The current activity of the

1
RFQs linked to this buyer
display within the RFQ
section.

3. The current activity of the POs

linked to this buyer record 2 3
display within the PO section.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 443

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

4. To review RFQ suggestions

and generate request for
quotes, click the RFQ’s tab.

5. Click the RFQ Entry button 8 9 6

to launch this entry program 4
and create RFQ records.

6. Click the Supplier Response 5

button to launch this program
and enter the responses you 7
have received on RFQ records
from suppliers.

7. The Overdue, Today, This

Week, and Future sheets
display the current RFQ records that fall within these time frames.

8. Click the Suggestions tab to evaluate and handle all RFQ suggestions you want to turn into RFQs.

9. Click the Ready tab to indicate which RFQs can be turned into purchase orders.

10. To review and enter purchase

orders, click the PO’s tab.

11. The Open PO’s sheet displays 10 14

all of the currently open
purchase orders.
11
12. If you need to create a new
PO or edit an existing one, 12
click the PO Entry button.
13
13. The Late, Today, This Week,
and Future sheets all display
the current PO records that
fall within these time frames.

14. Click the Web tab to review

all RFQs and POs you have
received through the internet.

15. The Actions menu gives you

immediate access to a
number of purchasing 15
programs you need.

16. You can launch Purchase

Order Entry, RFQ Entry,
Supplier Maintenance, and 16
various Suggestion programs
through the Actions menu.

CHAPTER 11 | PURCHASING

444 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 PURCHASING | CHAPTER 15

Reports
This section describes some key purchasing reports you use to review prices of both manufactured and purchased parts. You can run
these reports whenever you need. You can also set up each report to generate and print through a recurring, automatic schedule.
Review the Automatic Data Processing chapter in the Epicor ERP Implementation Guide for information on how to link a report to a
recurring schedule.

Part Price History Report

Use this report to review pricing information for your purchased parts. This report displays its information in order by part.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Supplier Relationship Management > Reports > Part Price Report

To run this report:

1. To display current prices, select the Most

Recent Prices Only check box.

2. If you want to view supplier part cross

references on this report, select the Include
Supplier’s Parts check box. 5

3. If you want to view manufacturer part cross 4

references on this report, select the Include 1
Manufacturer’s Parts check box. 2

4. Use the Filter sheet to limit this report to 3

only display parts for specific suppliers
and/or parts.

5. Click Print on the Standard toolbar.

Supplier Price History Report

Use this report to review pricing information for your purchased parts. This report displays its information in order by supplier.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Supplier Relationship Management > Reports > Supplier Price Report

To run this report:

1. To display current prices, select the Most

Recent Prices Only check box.

2. If you want to view supplier part cross

references on this report, select the Include
Supplier’s Parts check box. 5
3. If you want to view manufacturer part cross 4
references on this report, select the Include 1
Manufacturer’s Parts check box. 2
4. Use the Filter sheet to limit this report to 3
only display parts for specific suppliers
and/or parts.

5. Click Print on the Standard toolbar.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 445

CHAPTER 15 | PURCHASING

446 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

Chapter 16
Quality Assurance

The Quality Assurance and the Enhanced Quality Assurance (EQA) modules tie together all quality functions, whether
scrapping end parts, rejecting raw materials, tracking first article inspections (where a first part is tested regularly), and
indicating when parts are not compliant. With the Enhanced Quality Assurance module license, you can also track internal
education and training for your employees.

The chapter begins with the setup records you need to define before you can use the quality functions - the inspectors that
conduct inspections and the reasons material requires inspection. If you use the Enhanced Quality Assurance module, you can
enter specific inspection data for purchase order receipts, customer returns, and jobs or operations. To do this, you define the
inspection attributes you want to track and the specifications for those attributes. You then create inspection plans associated
with a part revision, job, or operation. You can also apply skip lot control to those suppliers that supply you with parts.

The second half of the chapter reviews the quality functions you use to process items that require inspection. First, use the
Nonconformance program to add non-conforming material found during job production. Then, the inspector uses Inspection
Processing to inspect this non-conforming material, in addition to the purchase order receipts that require inspection. If you
use the Enhanced Quality Assurance module, you also have access to Inspection Results Entry. Use this program to enter
specific inspection data. Then run the Inspection Data Tracker to view the inspection results.

Any job material, job assemblies, inventory, customer returns, or purchase order receipts that fail inspection are placed on the
Discrepant Material Report (DMR). The material review board then has the option to reject these parts or accept parts and
disposition to a job, rework, or inventory. At any time, a corrective action can be added to record what was done with the
material. This chapter concludes with key quality reports you use to monitor discrepant material.

In order to describe the entire business flow for this functionality, this chapter assumes you use both the Quality Assurance
and Enhanced Quality Assurance modules.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 447

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

Setup
This section describes the primary records you need to create for both the Quality Assurance and Enhanced Quality Assurance
modules. These programs are contained within the Setup folder. Only the primary records are described here. Some areas within the
next Operations section may also document setup records if they are required for a specific workflow.

You may also need to set up some parameters within Company Configuration. Some modules have global settings you define through
this administration program. For more information, review the application help for this module; the Configuration topic details the
options you define within Company Configuration. You can also review the Company Configuration chapter in the Epicor ERP
Implementation Guide.

Inspector Maintenance
You use Inspector Maintenance to create inspector records. Inspectors are the people in your shop who inspect material or parts for
defections, ensuring all items in the production cycle meet your quality standards. These records are used when you run Inspection
Processing.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > Setup > Inspector

To add an inspector:

1. Click the New button on the

Standard toolbar.
1
2. Enter an Inspector ID. This
value displays within 4
other programs and
reports.

3. Enter the Name of the

inspector. This value displays 2
on drop-down lists in other
programs. 3

4. When you finish, click Save.

Reason Code Maintenance

Use Reason Code Maintenance to assign standard explanations for labor scrap and rework, inspection processing, inventory
adjustments, and Return Material Authorization (RMA) entries. You can create reason codes which match your workflow needs.

Each reason code is assigned a reason type. Reason types are system-defined and cannot be changed. The following reason types are
used in manufacturing:

• Scrap: This code identifies a nonconformance quantity which can potentially be re-used.

• Quality Assurance: This code is used for inspection and corrective actions.

• DMR: This reason code is used for discrepant material review.

• Inventory Adjustments: Use this value to identify items being pulled out of inventory because they are non-conforming
materials.

• Rework: This code is used for items sent back to be re-worked after inspection or DMR.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > Setup > Reason Code

448 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

To add a reason code:

1. Select the Reason Type

this reason code is 2
assigned from the drop-down
list. In this example, you want
6
to add a reason code for 1
DMR.

2. Click the Down Arrow next 3 4

to the New button; select
New Reason Code.

3. Enter a Reason Code. This

value displays within other
programs and reports.

4. Enter a Description of the

5
reason code. This value
displays on drop-down lists in
other programs.

5. Depending on the reason type

selected, other fields become
available. For example, if you
want this reason code
available for selection in
Inspection Processing, select
options in the Inspection
section.

6. When you finish, click Save

on the Standard toolbar.

Global Alert Maintenance

Use Global Alert Maintenance to both activate and adjust global alerts. Global
Although global alerts cannot be changed, you
alerts are messages automatically sent out to pre-defined recipients when certain
can create custom global alerts through the
events occur within the database. Global alerts are an excellent communication
Business Activity Manager. For more information
tool that helps individuals keep up-to-date on current business activity.
on creating custom alerts, review the Business
Events that trigger global alerts are pre-defined and cannot be deleted. However, Activity Manager chapter in the Epicor ICE Tools
you can activate/deactivate pre-defined events and define the recipient of the alert User Guide.
if an alert is sent.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > Setup > Global Alert

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 449

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

To activate a global alert:

1. Click on the ID button to

initiate a search for a
pre-defined global alert.

2. In the Global Alerts Search

window, select the
pre-defined event you want
to activate and click OK.

450 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

3. The ID and Description fields

populate and cannot be 9
changed.

4. In order to use this alert,

select the Active check box.
4 5 6
5. If you want a memo created
when this event is triggered,
select the Create Memo
check box. The new memo is
assigned to the record (job, 3
order, quote, and, so on)
that caused the alert.
7
6. Select the Send Alert check
box to send an email when
this event is triggered. When
selected, additional fields you
use to define the recipients
who receive the alert become 8
available.

7. The From Email Address

and Label field values default
from settings in the Company
Configuration file; if you
need, you can edit these
values.

8. If you are sending an alert, define recipient information in the Alert section such as To, CC, and Text.

9. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar..

Inspection Attributes
Inspection attributes are quality elements you want reviewed during the inspection process. These attributes are then assigned to
specifications and used within inspection plans. You also assign a table field name to each attribute in order to collect and analyze
inspection data.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > Setup > Inspection Attribute

To create a new attribute:

1. Click the New button

on the Standard 7
toolbar.
1
2. In the Attributes field, enter
the identifier for the new
inspection attribute.

3. Enter a concise Description. 2

4 6
5

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 451

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

4. Select an Attribute Type from the drop-down list. Attribute types available include:

• Numeric

• Check box

• Combo box

• Character

• Date

• Comments

The specifications you define within Specification Maintenance for an inspection attribute depend on the attribute type. For
example, if you select Numeric, you can specify minimum and maximum values. If you select Combo box, minimum and
maximum values are disabled; however, you can specify the list of values you want to present to the user during inspection
processing. For more information on specifications, review the next Specification section.

5. Select the Table Field Name you want to assign to this attribute. This value determines where the data for this attribute is
stored within the inspection results table.

6. Once you assign this inspection attribute to a specification, the In Use icon becomes active and displays in green.

7. When you finish, click Save.

Continue to add all the inspection attributes you need.

Specification
A specification ties together the inspection attributes you want. You use Specification Maintenance to store the details, or
characteristics, of the inspection attributes. Characteristics include information such as minimum and maximum values, incremental
and initial values, tool tips, a list of acceptable values, and so on. The inspection attribute properties you define are used in the
inspection plan. The next section, Inspection Plan, shows you how to create these plans.

One specification can apply to many parts. For example, you have multiple parts in your database for steel bars. You could attach the
same specification to each part to save time on data entry.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > Setup > Specification

To create a specification:

1. Click the New button on

the Standard toolbar. 1

2. Within the Specification

field, enter an identifier.
2
3. Enter the Description, or the
explanation, for the new 3
specification.

452 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

Add a Revision

Specifications are revision controlled, so you can create multiple versions of the same specification.

To add a revision:

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New 1
button; select New
Specification 6
Revision.

2. The Revision Detail sheet 2

displays. In the Revision field,
enter the revision identifier. 3

3. Enter the Description for the 4

new revision.
5
4. Specify an Effective date; the
date when this revision is
available.

5. Optionally, find and select the Inspection Plan you want to assign to this specification revision. You can attach an inspection
plan to a specification. When you attach a specification to a part, operation, or RMA, the inspection plan defined on the
specification defaults; however, you can change this option.

6. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Assign Inspection Attributes

Now specify the inspection attributes you want to assign to this specification revision.

Here’s how:

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 1
select New Inspection
Attribute.
12
2. The Revision > Inspection
Attributes > Detail sheet
displays. Click the Inspection
Attribute button to find and
select an inspection attribute 2
to add to this specification
3
revision.
4
3. The Attribute Type for this
inspection attribute defaults 5
and cannot be changed. 6
4. The Description defined on 7
the inspection attribute record
defaults; if you need, you can 8
change this value. 9
5. In the Screen Label field, 10
enter the description you
want to display on the 11
Configurator input screen.

6. Enter the Minimum Value and the Maximum Value for this inspection attribute. These fields are not available if the attribute’s
type is Combo box.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 453

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

7. In the Increment field, specify the increments used to record an inspection value. For example, if you set the Maximum Value to
110, the Minimum Value to 100, and the Increment to 2, then the actual values of 100, 102, 104, and 106 are acceptable.
These fields are not available if the attribute’s type is Combo box.

8. Enter the Initial Value to display when inspection data is added to the inspection plan. Typically, this value is the expected value
for this attribute.

9. If used, enter the Tool Tip you want the Configurator to display.

10. In the List Values field, enter a comma-delimited list of options that display within the inspection plan. This field is available only
if the attribute’s type is Combo box.

11. In the Pass List Values field, enter an (optional) listing of valid pass values for this inspection attribute. The Epicor application
uses these values for testing inspection results. It uses the values defined on this list to determine if an inspection passes or fails.
For example, if 2,4,6, and 8 are defined as pass values and the user selects 8 within Inspection Results Entry, the Epicor
application designates 8 as a Pass value; other recorded inspection values are considered Failure values.

12. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar. Continue to add all inspection attributes to this specification revision.

Approve Specification Revision

When the specification revision is ready, you need to approve the specification revision before you can use it.

Here’s how:

1. Navigate to the Revision

> Detail sheet. 3

2. Select the Not Approved

check box. This clears the 1
specification for use, and the
Approved icon displays.

3. Click Save on the Standard

toolbar.

Inspection Plan
Inspection plans control the inspection process and are used to enter the results from inspecting those parts, operations, and RMAs in
which specifications and inspection plans are defined. Once you create an inspection plan record in the Inspection Plan program, you
can then launch the Configurator directly to design the entry form that others will use to capture the inspection results.

Inspection plans are revision-controlled and can be used with multiple This section briefly reviews the Configurator
specifications; the Configurator amends the input screen depending on the Designer. For more information on how to design
inspection attributes assigned to the current specification. For example, one an input screen, review Chapter 6: Configurator.
specification has three attributes and another specification has the same three
attributes plus an additional attribute. You could create an inspection plan that covers all four attributes; when the inspection plan for
the three attribute specification is called, the fourth attribute does not display during inspection results entry.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > Setup > Inspection Plan

454 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

To add an inspection plan:

1. Click the New button on the

Standard toolbar.
1
2. In the Inspection Plan
field, enter an identifier 5
for the inspection plan.

3. Enter a concise Description.

2
4. Select Inspection Plan from
the Inspection Plan Type 3
list. 4

Another inspection plan

type is Calibration Plan.
Calibration inspection plan
types are used to assist in
equipment maintenance.
For more information on
Equipment Maintenance,
review Chapter 9:
Maintenance Management.

5. Click Save.

Add a Revision

Inspection plans are revision controlled, so you can create multiple versions of the same inspection plan.

To add a revision:

1. Click the Down Arrow next

to the New button; select
1
New Inspection Plan
Revision.
5
2. The Revision > Detail sheet
displays. In the Revision field,
enter a unique revision
identifier.
2
3. Enter the Description, or
3
explanation, that further
defines this inspection plan 4
revision.
6
4. Specify an Effective date -
the date when this revision is
available.

5. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

6. Notice the red No Plan icon. This indicates a plan has not yet been configured for this inspection plan revision. Once you
configure an inspection plan using the Configurator Designer, the icon changes to a green Plan Exists icon. You will next
configure the inspection plan.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 455

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

Configure the Inspection Plan

Now you are ready to design the screens for inspection results entry. If you use the Enhanced Quality Assurance module, you can
create inputs in the Configurator using external sources; these values are the pre-defined inspection attributes used during the
inspection process.

To design the inspection results entry screen:

1. On the Revision > Detail

sheet within Inspection Plan
Maintenance, click the
Configure Inspection Plan
button.

2
2. The Configurator
Designer displays. 3

3. First, you need to add a 4

new configuration. Click
the Down Arrow next to the
New button.

4. Select New Configuration.

5. Next, you need to add a new page. Click the Down Arrow next to the New
button.

6. Select New Page. 5

456 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

7. When the Page Number window displays, click OK.

8. The Input Rules > Page

sheet displays. 9

9. Now add controls to this

page. To do this, click the
Actions menu and select
Design Tool Box. 8

10. Select the control you want to

add to the input page from
the Configurator control
window. In this example, you
select the Decimal control so
you can reference the
numeric Length inspection
attribute.
11
11. Select the area on the page
where you want the control
to appear. Move and stretch
the control so it displays in
the location and size you
want.
10

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 457

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

12. With the control selected,

navigate to the Input 16
Rules > Inputs > Detail
sheet. Use this sheet to define
parameters for the controls 12
placed on the input page.

13. Select the External

Reference check box to bring
in an inspection attribute’s
characteristics.

14. Click the Attribute button to

select an available inspection
attribute. The application
filters the attributes available
for selection by only
displaying those attributes
where the attribute type
matches the control added to
the page.

15. Depending on how you want 13

to leverage the inspection
inputs, select the Use 14
Minimum Value, Use 15
Maximum Value, Use
Incremental Value, Use
Initial Value, Use Tool Tip,
and Use Label Name check
boxes to determine what values are pulled in from the inspection attribute.

Depending on the selected attribute type, not all check boxes are available. For example, if you select an inspection attribute that
is a character attribute type, only the Use Tool Tip and Use Label Name check boxes display.

16. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. Continue to add pages and controls you want for this inspection plan revision.

Test the Inputs

When finished adding pages and controls, and adjusting the inputs as needed, you are ready to test the inputs.

Here’s how:

1. From the Actions menu, select Test Inputs.

458 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

2. The Test Inspection Plan window displays. 2

3. Enter the Specification ID you want to test.
3
4. From the Revision list, select the specification revision to test.
4
5. Click OK.
5

6. The Test Inputs 6

window displays.

7. Notice the inspection attribute

characteristics you defined on
the selected specification
revision display. You can now 7
test the inputs. For example,
the initial value of 36 displays
in the Length input field.

8. If you attempt to put a value

in the Length field
outside the minimum or 8
maximum values defined in
the specification for this
inspection attribute and click
Save, a message displays
stating the inspection plan failed.

Continue to test the inputs and adjust the pages and controls as you need.

You can apply a Pass/Fail variable to all Configurator

features. The Pass/Fail variable is set automatically on
the minimum/maximum values set for the inspection
attributes; if the results are below or above these
values, the inspection fails. However, you can define
rules to set the Pass/Fail variable inspections to other
controls as well. For more information about this
functionality, review Chapter 6: Configurator.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 459

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

Approve the Design

Once the design is complete and the configuration tested, you are ready to change the status of the design to Approved.

To do this:

1. Navigate to the Status

sheet. 5

2. Select the Approved check 6

box. When the Description
of Changes window displays,
enter the change explanation 1 2
and click OK.

3. The Change Log area

displays the date, time, and 4
user that changed the
configuration. 3

4. The Description of Change

section displays the change
explanation.

5. Click Save on the Standard

toolbar.

6. Exit the Configurator

Designer.

Approve the Inspection Plan Revision

Now you are ready to approve the inspection plan revision.

Here’s how:

1. In Inspection Plan
Maintenance, notice the
3
red No Plan icon is
replaced by a green Plan
Exists icon. This indicates an
approved inspection plan
exists for this inspection plan
revision.

2. Select the Not Approved

check box. This clears the
inspection plan for use, and
the Approved icon displays. 2
3. Click Save on the Standard 1
toolbar.

460 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

Skip Lot Control Code

Use Skip Lot Control Code to create the frequency rules in which parts are inspected at the time of receipt. You then assign these skip
lot control codes at the part - supplier level.

For each skip lot control code, you define the number of lots (receipts) to inspect, the number of receipts to skip between each
receipt, and the number of cycles to process before moving to the next pre-determined skip lot control code. In this example, you
want to define a skip lot control code for new suppliers.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > Setup > Skip Lot Control Code

To create a skip lot control code:

1. Click the New button on the

Standard toolbar.
1
2. Enter a unique identifier
in the Skip Code field. 13

3. Enter a Description for the

skip code. 2
4. Define the number of lots 3
(receipts) to Inspect.
4
5. Define the number of lots
(receipts) to Skip between 5
each inspected receipt. If the 6
receipt does not require
inspection, then the receipt is 7
not placed in the inspection 8
queue; rather, the receipt
passes directly to stock, to the 9
job, or to an operation. 10
6. Indicate the number of 11
inspect/skip cycles to process
12
before moving to the next
pre-defined skip lot code in
the Repeat field.

7. In the Minimum Cycles field, indicate the number of cycles to complete before the skip lot code can move to a cycle that does
not inspect as many lots. If this field is set to zero, the application ignores the check.

8. If you allow a quantity of inspected parts to fail inspection before the part moves to a more restrictive skip lot control code cycle,
where more lots are inspected, select the Use Maximum Reject check box.

9. If you selected the Use Maximum Reject check box, define the number of rejects to allow in the Maximum Reject (all Cycles)
field. If this field is set to zero, the application ignores the check.

10. Use the Reject Count By list to determine the value added to the Reject Count field in the inspection table. The options are Skip
Lot or Quantity. If you select Skip Lot, then the Reject Count is increased by 1 if the receipt inspected has a rejected quantity. If
you select Quantity, then the Reject Count is increased by the total failed quantity if the receipt inspected has a rejected quantity.

11. From the On Pass move to Skip code list, select the skip code the part quantity will use if both the number of cycles is the
same as the value defined in the Minimum Cycles field and the number of rejects is less than or equal to the value defined in the
Maximum Rejects (all Cycles) field. If you do not select a code from this list, then the current cycle will start again.

12. From the On Failure move to Skip code list, select the skip code that parts will use if both the number of cycles exceeds the
value defined in the Minimum Cycles field and the number of rejects exceeds the value defined in the Maximum Rejects (all
Cycles) field. If you do not select a code from this list, then the current cycle will start again.

13. When you finish, click Save.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 461

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

Part Maintenance
You associate inspection plans and specifications to either parts or operations. Then, when inspecting a part receipt or entering time
against an operation that requires inspection, you have the option to enter
inspection data for that part or operation using Inspection Results Entry. You can also associate a part on a purchase order line
to an inspection plan and specification within
In this example, you use Part Maintenance to associate an inspection plan
Purchase Order Entry. You associate inspection plans
and specification to a part revision. You can also define a different
and specifications to operations within Operation
inspection plan and specification for customer returns of the same part
Entry, Job Entry, Quote Entry, and the Engineering
revision. In addition to defining inspection plans and specifications to part
Workbench. When you associate inspection plans and
revisions, you can add suppliers to a part revision and attach skip lot code
specifications to a part or operation, the Inspection
logic.
Required check box is automatically selected.
Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance >
Setup > Part

Check Out the Part Revision

You must check out the part revision before you can attach inspection plans and specifications to it.

Here’s how:

1. Click the Part button and 3

then find and select a part.

2. In the Tree View, highlight

the part revision you want to
add an inspection plan and
specification. You can only 2 4 5
attach inspection plans and 1
specifications to part
revisions.

For more information on

how to add a revision,
review Chapter
11: Engineering.

3. Now check out the revision. To do this, click the Actions menu.

4. Highlight the Revision sub-menu.

5. Select Check Out Revision.

462 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

6. The Part Revision Checkout

window displays. In the
Revisions grid, highlight the
revision to check out.

7. Click the ECO button to find

and select the ECO group you
want to check out this
revision.

8. Click OK. The part

revision status is set to 6
Not Approved. Now you can
add inspection plans and
specifications to it.

Add Inspection Plan and Specification to Part Revision

Now that the part revision is checked out, you can attach inspection plans and specifications to it.

Here’s how:

1. Click the Down Arrow 1

next to the New button;
select New Part Inspection
Plan. 2
7
2. The Part > Revisions >
Inspection > Detail sheet
displays.
3
3. Click the Inspection Plan
button to find and select an 4
inspection plan. You do not 5
specify the inspection plan
revision because the 6
application always uses the
latest revision.

4. Click the Specification ID button to find and select a specification. You do not specify the specification revision because the
application always uses the latest revision.

5. Optionally, define the minimum Sample Size and/or Sample Size % quantity to inspect. You can enter values in both fields; the
application determines the sample size to use during inspection results entry. For example, you set the Sample Size to 10 and the
Sample Size % to 15%. If the application finds that the quantity available to inspect, based on the Sample Size % defined, is less
than the Sample Size defined, then the Sample Size value is used for the inspection.

6. If this inspection plan is the default for this part, select the Default check box. You can specify only one inspection plan as the
default.

7. Continue to add the needed inspection plans for this part revision. You can attach more than one inspection plan to a part
revision. For example, you need three inspections for one part revision - one visual inspection, one purity inspection, and one
microbial (pathogens) inspection. Then, in Inspection Results Entry, you can enter inspection data for each inspection plan. The
inspection plans you attach to a part all display on the List sheet. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 463

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

Add RMA Inspection Plan and Specification to Part Revision

You can also add an RMA inspection plan and specification to part revisions. The RMA
For more information on how to process
inspection plan and specification specified in Part Maintenance is used when you enter
and disposition RMAs, refer to Chapter 19:
inspection data while disposing an RMA.
Customer Returns.
You can only define one RMA inspection plan and specification for a part revision.

Here’s how:

1. Select the Part >

Revisions > Inspection 5
> RMA tab.

2. Click the Inspection Plan

button to find and select an 1
inspection plan to use when
entering RMA inspection data
for this part revision. 2
3. Click the Specification ID 3
button to find and select a
specification to use when 4
entering RMA inspection data
for this part revision.

4. Optionally, define the

minimum Sample Size or Sample Size % quantity to inspect.

5. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Add Skip Lot Control to Suppliers

You can apply skip lot control codes to suppliers for a specific part revision.

To do this:

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 1
select New Part Inspection
Supplier.
9
2. The Part > Revisions >
Inspection > Supplier >
Detail sheet displays. Click
the Supplier button to find
and select the supplier you
want to apply a skip lot
control for this part revision.
2
3. Select the Skip Lot
3
Controlled check box to
include this supplier in the 4
skip lot process. When you
select this check box, the 5
Skip Lot Controlled icon
turns green. 6

4. From the Skip Lot Code list,

select the code to apply to 7
this supplier.

464 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

5. The Inspection Count, Skip Count, Repeat Cycles, and Reject Count
For information on how to set up a skip lot
fields are application-maintained counters that display, respectively, the
control code, review the previous Skip Lot Control
number of receipts, skipped lots, cycles, and rejected lots recorded through
Code section.
the inspection process. However, you can adjust these fields to force further
inspections.

6. Select a Reject Count By method. This setting determines the value added to the Reject Count field in the inspection table. The
options are Skip Lot or Quantity. If you select Skip Lot, then the Reject Count is increased by 1 if the receipt inspected has a
rejected quantity. If you select Quantity, then the Reject Count is increased by the total failed quantity if the receipt inspected has
a rejected quantity.

7. Optionally, define the minimum Sample Size Quantity and/or Sample Size % to inspect. You can enter values in both fields;
the application determines the sample size to use during inspection results entry. For example, you set the Sample Size to 10 and
the Sample Size % to 15%. If the application finds that the quantity available to inspect, based on the Sample Size % defined, is
less than the Sample Size defined, then the Sample Size value is used for the inspection.

8. To inspect all receipts for this part revision from this supplier, select the Force Inspect All Receipts check box. When you select
this check box, the Inspect All icon turns green.

9. When finished, click Save on the Standard toolbar. Continue to add the suppliers you want for this part revision.

Check In and Approve Part Revision

You must check in and approve the part revision before the inspection plans, specifications, suppliers, and RMA details are applied to
this part revision.

Here’s how to check in and approve the part revision:

1. In the Tree View, highlight

the part revision you want to
check in. 2

2. Click the Actions menu.

3. Highlight the Revision sub- 1 3 4

menu.

4. Select Engineering
Workbench.

5. The Engineering
Workbench displays. In the
Tree View, highlight the part 7 10
revision you want to approve
and check in.
8
5 6
6. Select the Not Approved
9
check box. A green Approved
icon now displays.

7. Now you are ready to check

in the part revision. To do this,
click the Actions menu.

8. Highlight the Revision sub-

menu.

9. Select Check In. When the Description of Changes window displays, enter the change explanation and click OK. Click OK
again when the check in complete message displays.

10. Exit the Engineering Workbench.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 465

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

11. In Part Maintenance, notice

the part revision status is now
set to Approved.

11

Operations
This section details the operations you can run through the Quality Assurance and Enhanced Quality Assurance modules. Each
operation is described as a workflow to help guide you through the process from start to finish. These programs are primarily found
within the General Operations folder. If a unique setup record is required to run the operation, this record is also described in this
section.

Nonconformance
Use the Nonconformance program to add or update nonconformant materials during job production. Generally, you enter
nonconformance records because the material is bad, defective, suspect, or needs inspection. The material can be an assembly, raw
job material, scrap, items from a subcontractor, or parts from another source. The
information you enter is sent to an inspector, who then inspects the material and For information on dispositioning material,
dispositions it. review the next Inspection Processing section.

When nonconformant materials are reported by employees through Time and Expense Entry, nonconformance records are created.
You can then review and edit these records in the Nonconformance program. For these types of records, you can only modify the
quantity and the reason fields in Nonconformance. All the other fields are unavailable.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > General Operations > Nonconformance

Nonconformance - Material

To enter a nonconformance for material during job production:

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 1
elect New Material.
19 20 21 22
18
2. Enter the Employee who
discovered the
nonconformance. You can do
2
this by entering the
employee number directly or 4 5
3
by clicking the search button
to find and select it. 6

3. In the Job field, enter the job 7

in which the nonconformant
11 8 9 10
material was found.
13 12
14
15
16
17

466 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

4. Select the assembly on which the nonconformant material was found. You can enter this number directly, select it from the list,
or click the Assembly button to find and select it. If there is only one assembly on the job, a 0 displays in this field.

5. Select the Material sequence from the assembly that is nonconformant.

6. The Part number, Description, and Revision of the part only display for your information; you cannot change these values.

7. Enter the Quantity of the material that is nonconformant.

8. The default unit of measure for this part displays in the UOM field; if
The quantity can be expressed as a whole or as
you need, change the unit of measure.
a fraction with decimals (if allowed). For more
9. This Transaction displays the quantity of material for this information on the unit of measure functionality,
nonconformant record. This value is based on the unit of measure review the Part Parameters chapter in the Epicor ERP
defined for this job material part within Job Entry. Implementation Guide. If multiple units of measures
are tracked for the part, the quantity entered here
10. The UOM code represents the unit of measure assigned to the job cannot be greater than the on-hand quantity for this
material part within Job Entry. part. For more information on how you track
multiple units of measure, review the Parts section in
11. Lot specifies the lot number of the part identified as nonconformant. Chapter 17: Inventory Management.
This field is updated by the application; if you need, change the lot.

12. The Serial Numbers button becomes active if the part is assigned a serial number. If a discrepancy exists between the Quantity
field and the number of serial numbers entered at the time of purchase order receipt, and one of the warehouse plants is set to
Full Serial Tracking, the application requires entry of additional serial numbers.

13. Select the Reason the material is nonconformant.

14. Optionally, select the Operation Sequence in which the nonconformant material was found. You can enter this number directly,
select it from the list, or click the Operation Seq button to find and select it.

15. The Resource for the combination of job number and assembly displays in this field; if you need, change the resource assigned.

16. The warehouse and bin associated with the job from which you will move the nonconformant material defaults in the From
Warehouse and Bin fields; if you need, change the warehouse and bin.

17. Select the warehouse and bin where the nonconformant material should go for inspection in the To Warehouse and Bin fields.

18. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar. The application automatically assigns a transaction ID to the new
nonconformant record. In this example, the nonconformant record is assigned the Transaction ID 306.

19. Use the Subcontract sheet to add, edit, or delete open nonconformant
Shop floor personnel can also report nonconformant
records related to discrepant material from a subcontract operation.
material when they enter time against an operation.
20. Use the Operation sheet to add, edit, or delete open nonconformant These records are accessed through the
records related to discrepant job assemblies. Nonconformance program, however you can only
modify the Quantity and Reason values on these
21. Use the Inventory sheet to add, edit, or delete open nonconformant records. For more information, review Chapter 7:
records related to discrepant material in inventory. Time Management.

22. Use the Other sheet to add, edit, or delete open nonconformant
records that do not fit any of the other types of nonconformance records.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 467

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

Nonconformance – PO Receipts

You can view nonconformance records related to purchase order receipts in this program if the nonconformance records are closed.
The closed status indicates the PO receipt quantities have been inspected.

To view a purchase order receipt nonconformance:

1. Click Search on the

Navigation toolbar.

2. In the Nonconformance
Search window, filter the
1
search to only retrieve closed
nonconformance records by
selecting Closed in the
Status field. 3

3. Click Search.
2
4. Select the purchase order
receipt nonconformance you
wish to view.

5. Click OK.

6. Notice the information on the

PO Receipts sheet is for
display only.

468 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

Nonconformance - RMA

You can view nonconformance records related to RMA receipts in this program if the To learn more about RMAs and how to
nonconformance records are closed. The closed status indicates the RMA receipt quantities disposition customer returns, review
are dispositioned. Chapter 19: Customer Returns.
To view an RMA nonconformance:

1. Click Search on the

Navigation toolbar.

2. In the Nonconformance
Search window, filter the
search to only retrieve closed 1
nonconformance records by
selecting Closed in the
Status field. 3

3. Click Search.
2
4. Select the RMA receipt
nonconformance you wish to
view.

5. Click OK.

6. Notice the information on the

RMA sheet is only for your
information; you cannot
change these values.

7. Any pass or fail comments

entered during RMA
disposition or inspection
display on the Comments
sheet.
7

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 469

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

Inspection Processing
Use Inspection Processing Entry to inspect discrepant material found during job production or to inspect purchase order receipts and
customer returns.

You select the Inspection Required check box on a supplier record or a part
class. Any material purchased from that supplier or part class is automatically For more information on setting up suppliers, read
received into inspection; this stipulation cannot be changed during purchase the Supplier Maintenance section within Chapter
order entry or receipt entry. If the inspection check box is not set at the 15: Purchasing. For more information on part
supplier or part class, however, you can select this check box at purchase order classes, read the Part Class section within Chapter
entry or receipt entry. 13: Material Requirements Planning.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > General Operations > Inspection Processing

Inspection Processing Entry - Materials

To inspect discrepant material:

1. Click Search on the

Navigation toolbar.

2. In the Inspection Processing

Search window, you can filter
1
the search to only retrieve
pending inspection records
for a specific inspector.

3. Further refine your search by 4

selecting a Transaction Type.
2
4. Click Search.

5. Select the record you wish to

inspect. In this example, you 3
want to enter inspection
disposition information for a
nonconformant component
material found during
production. 5

6. Click OK.

470 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

7. Information about this

record entered in the 26
Nonconformance program 27 28
displays at the top of the
Materials > Detail sheet; it 7
cannot be changed.

8. The Inspector ID is the

individual who inspected the
material.

9. To verify the supplier or 9 10

manufacturer part numbers
are valid for your internal part 8
number, click the Supplier 12 13
11
Parts button. Review the Part
Cross References section in 14
Chapter 17: Inventory
Management for more 15
information. 16
18 19
10. If you use the Enhanced 17
Quality Assurance module, 22
the Inspection Data button 20
is available. 21
23
For more information on 24 25
how to enter inspection
data, review the next
Inspection Results section.

11. Enter the quantity of the material that passed inspection in the Passed Quantity field.

12. Select the Request Move check box to indicate the passed quantity needs to be moved to another location. This check box is
available if you use the Advanced Material Management module. For more information about this module, review application
help.

13. If you want to print tags for items that passed inspection, click the Print Tags button and select the tags you need.

14. In the Issue To section, select Stock to issue the material to stock, or select Job Material to issue the material to a job.

15. If material that has passed inspection is related to a job, the Job, Assembly, and Material fields are available.

16. If you need to select locations different from the default warehouse/bin settings, specify a Warehouse and Bin to move the
passed quantity.

17. Enter the quantity of the material that failed inspection in the Failed Quantity field.

18. Select the Request Move check box to indicate the failed quantity needs to be moved to another location. This check box is
available if you use the Advanced Material Management module. For more information about this module, review application
help.

19. If you want to print tags for items that failed inspection, click the Print Tags button.

20. Select the Reason the quantity failed inspection.

21. The Warehouse drop-down list defines the warehouse into which the failed quantity will be moved.

22. The Bin defines the bin into which the failed quantity will be moved. If you do not know the bin number, click the Bin button to
find and select it.

When this inspection record is saved, the quantity for that bin is not updated. Instead, the bin information, reason code, and
failed quantity combine to create a DMR (Discrepant Material Report) record that you use within DMR Processing.

23. Enter a DMR number for the failed quantity; optionally, leave this field set to 0 (zero) to cause the application to automatically
create a new DMR record for DMR Processing.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 471

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

24. Select the Create Corrective Action check box to launch Corrective Actions when this inspection record is saved. Use this
functionality to create a corrective action record for the quantity of material that did not pass inspection.

25. If you are failing a part quantity that uses serial numbers, you must click the Serial Numbers button to find and select the serial
number for each failed part.

26. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. If the application automatically assigns DMR numbers to failed quantities, a message box
displays the assigned DMR number. Click OK.

27. Use the Operations sheet to inspect nonconformant records related to discrepant job assemblies.

28. Use the Inventory sheet to inspect nonconformant records related to discrepant material in inventory.

Inspection Processing Entry – PO Receipts

To inspect purchase order receipts:

1. Click Search on the 10

Navigation toolbar to find
and select a purchase order
receipt requiring inspection.
1
2. Information about this record
previously entered in Receipt
2
Entry displays at the top of
the PO Receipts > Detail
sheet.
3
To learn more about
entering purchase order
receipts, review Chapter 18:
Shipping and Receiving. 4

5
3. The Inspector ID displays the
individual who inspected the 6
material.

4. Enter the quantity of the

material that passed
inspection in the Passed 7
Quantity field.
8
5. In the Received To section,
9
select Stock to issue the
material to stock, or select
Job Material to issue the
material to a job. If this part is
part of a subcontract, the Job SubContract option becomes available.

6. If the material has passed inspection related to a job, the Job, Assembly, and Sequence fields are available.

7. Enter the quantity of the material that failed inspection in the Failed Quantity field.

8. Select the Reason the quantity failed inspection.

9. Enter a DMR number for the failed quantity; optionally, leave this field set to 0 (zero) so the application automatically creates a
new DMR record for DMR Processing.

10. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. If the application automatically assigns DMR numbers for failed quantities, a message
displays indicating these numbers were assigned.

472 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

Inspection Processing Entry – RMAs

Customer returns received into inspection are processed through the RMA Disposition
To learn more about RMAs and how to
program. You can also have the Quality Assurance module licensed, you can also view
disposition customer returns, read Chapter
the customer returns received in Inspection Processing, and, optionally, disposition the
19: Customer Returns.
returned material directly from the RMA’s sheet.

To view or disposition RMAs:

1. Click Search on the

Navigation toolbar to find
and select an RMA to view or 1 2
disposition.

2. Information about this record

entered in RMA Processing
displays in a grid on the
RMA’s sheet.

3. Click the RMA Disposition

button to disposition the
returned material.

Inspection Processing Entry – First Articles

A first article inspection is a quality assurance inspection on the first component or assembly run after a new setup is complete. An
engineer or job manager can define the sample size to be inspected within Job Entry. Once a shop employee clocks into the operation,
a new first article record is added to the First Article queue in Inspection Processing. Additionally, the inspector can be notified through
a global alert that a first article inspection is created.

You can also manually enter first article records through Inspection Processing. This process is illustrated in the following example.

1. Click on the First

Articles tab. 2

2. Click the New button on the

Standard toolbar.
1

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 473

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

3. The First Article window 3

displays.

4. Enter the Job Number,

Assembly, and Operation
from which the first
articles originate. 4

5. Notice the Part and 5

Revision information for 7
this first article display.
6
6. Optionally, click the
Resource ID button to 8
find and select the
resource that will produce the
first articles.

7. Specify the quantity of first articles planned to be inspected in the Expected Quantity field.

8. Click OK. When asked to confirm changes, click Yes.

9. Now you are ready to

process this first article 15
inspection. Click Search on 9 10
the Navigation toolbar to
find and select the first article
record just created.

10. Information about this record

displays on the First Articles
sheet.

11. The Inspector ID is the

individual who inspected the 11
material.
12
12. If you know the employee
responsible for the articles in 13
this inspection, you can enter
it in the Employee field; 14
otherwise, click the
Employee button to find and
select the employee.

13. Enter the quantity inspected in the Quantity field.

14. Select the Status of this first article inspection. Available options:

• Approve – Indicates an approved operation status. Labor can now be posted against the operation.

• Provisional – Indicates an operation that can proceed, with an additional required inspection.

• Resubmit – Indicates the operation may continue, but another inspection is required.

• Waiting - Identifies a waiting status for an inspection. A new record is automatically set to Waiting.

15. Click Save.

474 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

Inspection Results
Use Inspection Results Entry to enter and gather inspection data for parts, operations, resources, equipment, and fixed assets. You can
access this program through other programs or from the Main Menu.

When you launch Inspection Results Entry from another program, data such as Part, Job, Quantity, and so on automatically populates
the results record. You can launch Inspection Results Entry from Time Entry, Report Quantity (MES), End Activity (MES), RMA
Disposition, and Inspection Processing – all types.

Once the inspection quantity is established, you enter inspection results for each item using the configured screen and rules created
for the inspection plan and specification defined. From this test data, the application determines - based on the rules - if the item has
passed or failed. In some cases, the quantity passed and failed is returned to the calling process.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > General Operations > Inspection Results Entry

While you can access Inspection Results Entry from the above path, the following example launches the program from Inspection
Processing Entry. To show this feature, a purchase order receipt is processed that requires inspection. This receipt has a part revision
with both an inspection plan and a specification.

To enter inspection results:

1. Navigate to Production
Management > 1
Quality Assurance >
General Operations >
Inspection Processing 2

2. Click Search on the 3

Navigation toolbar to find
and select a purchase order
receipt requiring inspection.

3. Information about this record 4

previously entered in Receipt 5
Entry displays at the top of
the PO Receipts > Detail
sheet.

4. From the Inspector ID list,

select the individual that is
inspecting the material.

5. Because the part revision on

this purchase order has both
an inspection plan and a
specification, the Inspection
Data button is available. Click
this button.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 475

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

6. The Inspection Results

Entry program displays. 6
8 9
7. If you access Inspection
Results Entry from the Main
Menu, the NCM, Job, 7
and Part fields are 10 11 12
available to search for the
nonconformance, job, 13
and part records you 14 15
want to enter inspection 17
data.
16
In this example, however,
these fields are not available
because you accessed this
program from within another
process – inspection
processing. Rather, they
display the information from
the process and cannot be
changed.

8. Whether the Enter Operation Information check box is selected or cleared depends on if you call Inspection Results Entry from
another program or from the Main Menu. If you launch Inspection Results Entry from another program, the program either
selects or clears this check box. When you call this program from the Main Menu and define a nonconformance record or job,
clearing this check box causes the inspection plan for the job or assembly to be used instead of the inspection plan for the
operation.

9. The Part Inspection Documents and Specification Documents indicators display in green once the current part revision and
specification have documents attached to them.

10. Use the Inspection Type list to define the type of inspection you are conducting. If you select a nonconformance, job, or part
record, the Inspection Type defaults to Part and cannot be changed; however, you have other options as well. Options include:

• Part

• Resource

• Equipment

• Asset

11. The Quantity field displays the quantity from the nonconformance, RMA, job, or purchase order receipt. This field works in a
similar way as other fields in this program. If you launch Inspection Results Entry from another program, the quantity value
defaults and cannot be changed. If you access this program from the Main Menu, this field is available.

12. The Inspection Quantity field either displays the Sample Size value or the application-calculated quantity based on the Sample
Size % defined on the part revision, or, if this value is not defined, it displays the same value as the Quantity field. In either case,
you can change this value.

13. If you launch Inspection Results Entry from another program and that job, operation, part, or nonconformance has a plan, the
Inspection Plan field displays this value by default. If you need, you can change this value.

14. If you launch Inspection Results Entry from another program, and that job, operation, part, or nonconformance has an associated
specification, that specification defaults in the Specification field; if you need, you can change this value.

15. Click the Generate Test Set button to create sample test rows in the grid. The numbers of rows created equals the value
specified in the Inspection Quantity field.

16. Highlight the row in the grid for which you want to enter inspection results.

17. Click the Enter Results button.

476 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

18. The configured screen

designed for the 18
inspection plan selected
in Inspection Results Entry
displays. This configured 19
screen also uses the
specification selected in
Inspection Results Entry.

19. Enter the inspection results;

click Save on the Standard
toolbar.

20. You return to Inspection

Results Entry. Notice the
grid displays the Failed status 21
if any of the inspection data
inputs do not pass the
specification or other defined
configuration rules.

21. Continue to enter inspection

results for all rows. When
finished, close the program.

20

22. In this example, you

return to Inspection 23
Processing Entry. Notice the
Passed and Failed Quantity
fields update based on the
inspection results.

23. Complete the remaining

required fields. When you
finish, click Save on the
Standard toolbar.

22

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 477

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

DMR Processing
Use DMR Processing to process job material, job assemblies, inventory, customer returns, or purchase order receipts that fail inspection.
These discrepant parts are placed on the Discrepant Material Report (DMR).

In this program, you decide how to deal with discrepant parts. You can accept
them, deciding they can be used, or you can reject them, sending them back Packing slips for DMR rejected parts are processed
to your supplier. You can create a debit memo request from the supplier for in Miscellaneous Shipment Entry. This standardizes
the rejected parts. shipping procedures and enables part tracking for
quantities returned to suppliers.
You can enter as many acceptances, rejections, and debit memo requests as
necessary for a single DMR. For example, you can accept a quantity into your stock, accept a quantity into a job material record, reject
a quantity and assign it an RMA number so you can return it to the supplier, and reject a quantity you will scrap. The rejected and
accepted quantity total must equal the discrepant quantity total on the DMR.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > General Operations > DMR Processing

DMR Processing - Header

To process a failed quantity:

1. Click the DMR Number

button to find and select 8
the DMR record you want to
process.

2. The Total Quantities section 3 2

displays the accepted and 1
rejected quantities. This must
equal the failed quantity
when done. 5

3. The Open/Closed button

indicates whether this DMR is
complete and closed. A DMR 4
is automatically closed when
the total accepted quantity
plus the total rejected
quantity equals the discrepant 7 6
quantity on the DMR.

4. If the DMR was created from

a job material or job
subcontract operation, the
supplier from the purchase order associated with the job material or subcontract operation displays in the Supplier section. Any
debit memos you request for this DMR is associated with this supplier. If you need, select a different supplier.

5. The Status section displays the current costs associated with the parts to be dispositioned.

6. You can use the user-defined Check Off fields to alert individuals when a DMR
For more information on Check Offs, review
record is processed. To use these fields, you must first activate the alert that
application help.
corresponds to the check off field in Global Alerts.

7. If the discrepant parts are from inventory or a purchase order receipt, the Location section displays the name of the warehouse
and bin from which they came.

8. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

478 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

DMR Processing - Accept

Depending on the transaction type, you can accept parts on the DMR (Discrepant Material Report) to a job material sequence, to a job
operation sequence, or into stock. In this example, you are accepting some parts on the DMR to a job material sequence.

1. Click the Down Arrow 1

next to the New button;
select Accept – Job
Material. 10

2. The Accept > Material >

Detail sheet is available for 3 4
data entry. 2
3. Use the Accept > Operation 5
sheet to disposition accepted
parts to the job from which 6 9
they originally came.
7
4. Use the Accept > Stock 8
sheet to disposition accepted
parts into stock.

5. The Job linked to this material displays by default; if you need, change the job.

6. Enter the Quantity of this discrepant material you are accepting to the job. The DMR is closed when the entire Accepted
quantity plus the entire Rejected quantity equals the total discrepant quantity.

7. Select the Reason for accepting the material to the job.

8. The Warehouse and Bin specifies the shop floor location where you are returning the discrepant material; if you need, you can
change these values.

9. The Issued Complete check box indicates whether the accepted quantity completes the amount to be used for this material
sequence. If the issue quantity to-date is less than the planned requirement, selecting this check box will free any remaining
allocation. This check box is automatically selected if the quantity entered plus any previous quantity issued exceeds the
estimated material or assembly pull quantity.

10. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

DMR Processing - Reject

Use this sheet to enter rejected material information for a DMR (Discrepant Material Report) record.

1. Click the Down Arrow 1

next to the New button;
select New Reject
Material. 11

2. Enter the Supplier RMA 10

(return material authorization)
number that the supplier has
2 6
given you to attach to this
discrepant material. 3 7
3. Enter the Quantity of the 4
discrepant material you are 5
rejecting. The DMR is closed
when the entire Accepted 8
quantity plus the entire 9
Rejected quantity equals the
DMR’s total discrepant
quantity.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 479

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

4. Select the Reason for rejecting the material. You can select a default system reason code or a reason code you have created. For
information on these codes, review the previous Reason Codes section.

5. If you are rejecting parts on the DMR that uses serial numbers, click the Serial Numbers button to find and select the serial
number for each rejected part.

6. Select a Resolution. Available options:

• Request Debit Memo – If you save this record using this option, the application requests a debit memo from the supplier.
This memo uses the rejected quantity and the cost per unit defined on the purchase order. A debit transaction for the rejected
material is added to the DMR record.

• Require Supplier Credit – If you save this record using this option, the application creates a credit note for the supplier. This
credit note uses the rejected quantity and the cost per unit defined on the purchase order. A credit transaction for the rejected
material is added to the DMR record.

• No Further Action – If selected, you are accepting the write-off of the rejected materials and the rejected materials are not
returned to the supplier.

8. To indicate that goods will be returned to the supplier, select the Return to Supplier check box.

9. If the DMR originated with the inspection of a purchase order receipt, the packing slip and line number default in the Pack/Line
field; if need, you can change this value.

10. The PO Number and Unit Price information defaults from the packing slip selected in the Pack/Line field.

11. Optionally, enter additional information on the Reject > Comments sheet.

12. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

DMR Processing – Debit/Credit

You can request a debit memo or require a supplier credit for both an accepted material and a rejected material. In this example, the
inspector fails the material received from a supplier because it is corroded. In DMR Processing, you determine you can still use the
material as long as you clean it. You accept the material, but you still request a debit memo for the cost to clean the material.

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 1
select New Debit Memo.
13
2. The Debit/Credit > Detail
sheet displays. 2 4
3
3. The Part number for the DMR 6 7
displays.
5
4. The Debit/Credit button
8
indicates if this transaction is
a debit memo or supplier 9
credit.
10
5. If the Currency Management 11
module is licensed, you can
12
change the currency to use
for this debit memo by
selecting a different currency
in the Currency field.

6. Optionally, change the

Exchange Rate for this transaction. The exchange rate currently listed in the Currency Master file defaults.

7. Select the Lock check box to lock the exchange rate for this transaction. If this check box is selected, the exchange rate specified
at the time of this entry is used for the debit memo, even if the actual market rates change between now and the time the debit
memo is created.

480 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

8. The Rate Group displays the rate group for the currency exchange rate.

9. Enter the Unit Cost. The unit cost from the packing slip defaults if a packing slip was specified on the Reject sheet.

10. Specify the quantity for which you would like the amount in the Unit Cost field credited to you by the supplier in the Quantity
field.

11. Select the Reason you are requesting the debit memo.

12. Once the debit memo or supplier credit is processed by accounts payable, the Invoice field is updated with the invoice number.

13. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

14. Notice on the Header sheet

the Total Quantities section
displays the parts on the DMR
you accepted and the parts
on the DMR you rejected. The 16 15 14
remaining parts on the DMR
now should be 0 (zero).

15. Because the entire Accepted

quantity plus the entire
Rejected quantity equals the
total discrepant quantity on
the DMR, the Open/Closed
button now shows Closed.
You can select the check box
next to the Open/Closed
button to indicate this DMR is
complete and closed. Now
the information on this DMR
cannot be changed unless the
DMR is reopened. A DMR is
automatically closed when the
total accepted quantity plus the total rejected quantity equals the discrepant quantity on the DMR.

16. Use the History sheet to review the history of actions taken for a Discrepant Material Report record.

Corrective Action
Use Corrective Action to specify what actions to take on nonconformant items. These items are specified in nonconformance entries in
the Nonconformance program.

A corrective action entry describes the action and contains information on the nonconformance entry, inspection details, and the
responsible employee. A corrective action entry also indicates the date on which the action must occur.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > General Operations > Corrective Action

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 481

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

Corrective Action - Detail

To add a corrective action:

1. Click the New button on

the Standard toolbar. 1

2. Enter a Description of 15 16 17
13
the action that should be
taken. In this example, you 14
2
want to uncover the reason 3
why the steel you receive
from this specific supplier is 5 4
corroded. 6
3. Click the Non-Conf button to 7 8
find and select the
9
nonconformance record this
corrective action is addressing. 10
To view the entire 11
nonconformance record, click
the Actions menu and select 12
Non-Conformance.

You can also start a corrective action from DMR

Processing. When you do this, both the
Nonconformance record and DMR Number values
default from DMR Processing. You cannot change
these values.

4. The DMR Number linked to this nonconformance record displays in this field.

5. Select the Department responsible for carrying out the corrective action.

Job departments are set up in Job Department

Maintenance. For more information on this program,
read application help.

6. Click the Assigned To button to find and select the shop employee responsible for this corrective action.

7. Today’s date displays into the Date Opened field, but you can change this value if you need.

8. Select the date the corrective action is required in the Due Date field.

9. Use the Action Complete field to enter the date on which the action was finished.

10. Select the Root Cause for the corrective action.

Root causes and corrective actions are Quality

Assurance reason types and are respectively defined
as Cause and Corrective Action. Reason codes are
maintained in Reason Code Maintenance. For more
information, read the Reason Code Maintenance
section earlier in this chapter.

11. Select the Corrective Action to correct the problem.

12. Use the Audit Information section to track the inspector or auditor assigned to review the corrective action once complete.

13. When you finish, click Save.

14. An Action ID number is now assigned to this corrective action entry.

482 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

15. Use the Root Cause Investigation sheet to add comments to help with the investigation of the problem.

16. If you need, use the Action Comments sheet to enter information about the action or solution.

17. Use the Audit Comments sheet to enter comments that pertain to inspecting the part after the corrective action takes place.

Internal Employee Training

The Internal Employee Training features help you manage employee course training.
The employee training functionality requires
Through these features you can document and plan training courses. You can also
the Enhanced Quality Assurance license.
manage course schedules, student demand, and expenses.

Training Course Maintenance

Use Training Course Maintenance to create and maintain courses for your organization. Each course can have multiple revisions to
create subject matter variations. You can also duplicate a course and use it as a template.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > Setup > Training Course

Create a New Course

To create a new course:

1. Click the Down Arrow next to the

New button; select New Course. 4

2. Enter a Course ID code to uniquely

identify the course. 1
3. Enter a Description of the course.
2
4. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.
3

Create a Course Revision

To create a course revision:

1. Click the Course ID button to

search for and select a course for 2
which to make a new revision.

2. Click the Down Arrow next to the

New button; Select New Revision. 1

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 483

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

3. The Revision > Detail

sheet displays. In the 8
Revision field, enter a
revision identifier.

4. Enter a Description for the

new revision.
3
5. Specify a Revision Date and
Effective Date – the date 4
when this revision is available. 5
6. Select the Course Duration; 6
options include Hours, Days,
7
Weeks, and Months.

7. Optionally enter the Training

Expires in timeframe.

8. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Duplicate an Existing Course

To duplicate an existing course:

1. Click the Course ID

button to search for and 8 2
select a course to
duplicate.

2. From the Actions menu,

select Duplicate.
1

3. The Duplicate Course window

displays. In the New Course ID field,
enter a unique identifier.
3
4. Enter a Description of the course.
4
5. Enter a Revision identifier for the new 5
course.

6. Enter or accept the default 6

Description for the revision.
7
7. Click OK.

8. Click Save on the Standard toolbar

484 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

Training Course Schedule Maintenance

Use Training Course Schedule Maintenance to schedule course training sessions, add attendees for planned training sessions, enter
employee expenses, and record each employee’s final result from attended course training sessions.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > General Operations > Training Course Schedule

To create a new course schedule:

1. Click the Course ID

button to search for 9
and select a course.

2. Click the down arrow 2

next to the New
button; select New Course 1
Schedule.

3. In the Course Dates section,

define the course schedule
including dates and the
duration. 3

4. Specify the Course Location

of the training course session.
4 7
5. Select the Instructor for the 5
training session; options
8
include Employee, Supplier, or
Customer.
6
6. Click the appropriate
Employee, Supplier, or
Customer button to select
the instructor for the training
session.

7. Optionally enter the Max Attendees for the training session.

8. In the Course Cost field, define the expense per attendee for the duration of the training session.

9. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 485

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

Employee Course Request

Submit course training needs or interests through Employee Course Request. Your employees use this program to request to attend a
specific training course. Once a training request is entered, it is automatically sent to Employee Training Course Maintenance with a
status of Requested. Management must approve all request submissions.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > General Operations > Employee Course Request

To request to attend a training session:

1. Click New on the Standard

toolbar. 4
2. Click the Course ID 1
button to find and select
a course session.

3. Click the Employee button

to search for and select your 2
employee identification code.

4. Click Save. Your request has

been submitted for approval.
3

Employee Training Course Maintenance

Use Employee Training Course Maintenance to add a required training course, or courses, to an employee record, approve employee
requests for training, and update attendance and results of a completed course training session. An employee record for course
training can include the following statuses:

• Requested – used for employee submissions requesting to attend a specific course training session.

• Planned – used to identify the planned attendance of a specific course training session.

• Firm - used to identify approved attendance for a specific course training session.

• Attended – used for historical record of course training sessions completed per employee.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > General Operations > Employee Training Course

486 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

To approve an employee training request:

1. Click the Employee

button to search for 5
and select an employee.

2. In the Course ID field, the

1
requested course displays.

3. The Course Status drop-

down list displays the current
state of the request. Available
2
options:

• Requested - The request

is placed by the employee. 3

• Planned - The course is

tentatively scheduled to 4
occur.

• Firm - The course is

scheduled for this
employee.

4. Click the Course Schedule

button to search for and
select the training session.

5. Click Save on the Standard

toolbar.

To update attendance and results:

1. Click the Employee

4
button to search for
and select an employee.

2. Select the course

2 1
session your employee
attended under the Firm
node within the Tree View.

3. In the Course Dates section,

update details of the session
such as overall expenses,
attendee results,
reimbursement requirements,
and any additional
comments.

4. Click Save on the Standard

toolbar.
3

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 487

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

Reports
This section describes some key quality reports you use to monitor discrepant material. You can run these reports whenever you need.
You can also set up each report to generate and print through a recurring, automatic schedule. Review the Automatic Data Processing
chapter in the Epicor ERP Implementation Guide for information on how you link a report to a recurring schedule.

Nonconformance Analysis
The Nonconformance Analysis Report lists all nonconformance entries, separated by defective units, material issues, and scrapped
materials. Cost totals also display on this report.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > Reports > Nonconformance Analysis

To generate this report:

1. Use the From and To fields to

specify the date range of
nonconformance records on
the report.

2. Select the nonconformance 6

types you would like to see 4
on the report. The only RMA
records retrieved are those
defined as being in
nonconformance because 1
they failed during disposition
processing. 2
3. If you want to include the
comments added during
3
nonconformance entry, select
the Print Comments check
box.

4. Use the Filter sheet to filter

the report by Parts,
Employees, and/or
Resources.
5
5. Select how you would like
the report organized in the
Sort By field.

6. Click Print on the Standard

toolbar to run the report.

CHAPTER 12 | INVENTORY
MANAGEMEN

488 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 QUALITY ASSURANCE | CHAPTER 16

Inspection Pending
The Inspection Pending Report lists all items you have received to inspection including those received through Receipt Entry or Return
Material Authorization. The report also indicates if a variance exists between the purchase order cost and the invoice cost for the
receipt.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > Reports > Inspection Pending

To generate this report:

1. Use the Report Options

section to indicate those
items you want to review on
the report.

2. Select an As of Date. All

6
items sent to Inspection
on or before this date 1
display on the report.

3. If you want to include

inspection activity closed since
the As of Date, select the
Show Periods Closed
Activity check box.

4. Select the Page Break

Between Sections check box
to start a new report page for
each section (based on the
2
chosen Report Options).
3
5. Select the Page Break
Between PO Inspectors 4
check box to start a new
report page for each 5
Inspector’s items.

6. Click Print on the Standard

toolbar to run the report.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 489

CHAPTER 16 | QUALITY ASSURANCE

Open DMR Status Report

The Open DMR Status Report includes basic information about all open Discrepant Material Reports (DMR), as well as a transaction
history section. This report includes subtotals for each DMR and a total value of all open DMRs.

Main Menu Path: Production Management > Quality Assurance > Reports > Open DMR Status

To generate this report:

1. Use the Cut Off Date to

define the open DMRs to
include on the report. Any
DMRs still open as of this
date will print.
5
2. To indicate a new report page
should print for each new
DMR, select the New Page 1
per DMR check box.
2
3. Select the Show Period’s 3
Closed Activity to print all
DMR activity closed since the
Cut Off Date. 4

4. You can Sort By either DMR

number or part number.

5. Click Print on the Standard

toolbar to run the report.

490 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

Chapter 17
Inventory Management

The Inventory Management module is part of the core functionality of the application. It contains all of the information
related to an item including costs, quantities, and on-hand requirements.

Before you begin using this module, you must define inventory information for part records. Besides the main inventory
details, you must define the part’s unit of measure codes for inventory, selling, and purchasing transactions. You can also
track part records using lots or serial numbers; this module contains the functionality to set up these tracking functions. You
also define the plants that manufacture part quantities, as well as the countries of origin for the manufactured and
purchased parts.

The primary function of this module is to manage the flow of materials from incoming purchase orders, through
manufacturing, and lastly, shipping to the customer. These items can be received to stock or directly to the job, and then
shipped from stock or from inventory. Inventory transactions are made in the same way regardless of the manufacturing
environment - make-to-order (MTO) or make-to-stock (MTS). These transactions result in costs that are posted to the general
ledger.

To complete the Inventory functionality, a thorough set of tools is available to assist you during both cycle counting and
physical inventory counting. Use these tools to make sure the part quantities available within your warehouses are accurate
and up-to-date.

INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 12

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 491

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

Setup
This section describes the primary records you need to create for the Inventory Management module. These programs are contained
within the Setup folder for this module. Only the primary records are described here. Some areas within the next Operations section
may also document setup records if they are required for a specific workflow.

You may also need to set up some parameters within Company Configuration. Some modules have global settings you define through
this administration program. For more information, review application help for this module; the Configuration topic details the options
you define within Company Configuration.

Parts
You store information on each part you manufacture or purchase within Part Maintenance records. This information includes general
information such as part number and description. It also contains more specific inventory information such as unit of measure, non-
stock status, weight, and warehouse information (primary warehouse and bin, and minimum, maximum, and safety stock quantities).

Many fields in the part master record impact multiple areas of your Epicor application. Some of these fields have already been
discussed in previous chapters of this guide. For example, Chapter 11: Engineering reviews basic part information on the Part and Plant
sheets of Part Maintenance, while the Epicor ERP Implementation Guide describes additional programs used to configure part records.
This section of the guide focuses on part fields and features that affect inventory.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Part

Part Inventory Details

The fields below describe part details that relate directly to the Inventory Management module.

1. Select the UOM Class

you need for this part
record. A Unit of
Measure Class defines
the combination of unit
of measure values valid
for the part and the 1
factors required to
convert part quantities to 2
the base unit of measure.
When a new part is
assigned to a UOM Class
and it is used in a part
transaction, you cannot 7 6
change the UOM Class.
For more information on
creating UOM Classes, 8
review the Epicor ERP
Implementation Guide.
When a change is made 3 9
to a UOM Class within
4
a parent company, the
application 5
automatically updates
the UOM Class values
assigned to a global
part within all child
companies.

492 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

2. Click the Primary UOMs drop-down lists to select the unit of measure values you use for storing (Inventory), sales orders (Sales),
and purchase orders (Purchasing):

• Inventory – Typically this value is the smallest unit of measure in which you stock the part. The value you select is the default
UOM for all inventory related transactions. The first value that displays is the code selected as the Base UOM within the UOM
Class.

• Sales – Defines the primary sales and quotes UOM for the part. This unit of measure value is the default for all sales orders
and quotes created for this part. The first value that displays is the code selected as the Default UOM within the UOM Class.

• Purchasing – Defines the primary purchasing UOM for the part. This unit of measure value is the default for all purchase
orders created for this part. The first value that displays is the code selected as the Default UOM within the UOM
Class.CHAPTER 12 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

3. If required by Intrastat reporting, select the Country of Origin for this part. This value defines the country from which this part
is created. Some European countries require you report this code to Intrastat authorities when parts arrive from other European
Union (EU) countries. If you need, you can define all the countries of origin you need for this part within the Reporting > Country
of Origin sheet. Use this sheet to indicate the relative value and quantity percentage breakdown for each country. Review the
following Part Maintenance – Country of Origin section for more information.

4. Enter the Unit Net Weight for an inventory unit of this part. After you define this numeric value, select the weight unit of
measure you need, like kilograms, pounds, ounce, and so on. This value is multiplied against line quantities to calculate the Total
Net Weight value on the invoice’s Intrastat Data sheet.

5. Enter the Unit Net Volume for an inventory unit of this part. After you define this numeric value, select the volume unit of
measure you need, like cubic centimeters, square inches, and so on. This value is used to determine the volume of the part
quantity on the Fulfillment Workbench. For more information about the Fulfillment Workbench, review Chapter 5: Sales Order
Processing.

6. If you want to track this part by lot, select the Track Lots check box. Each time you enter an inventory transaction for this part,
you must also enter a lot number reference. You can define the lot numbers available for this part through the Lots sheets.
Review the following Part Maintenance – Lots section for more information.

7. Select the Track Multiple UOMs check box to indicate the application Before you select the Track Multiple UOMs check
can record inventory balances for the current part using multiple units box, verify you need to store this part using
of measure. If this check box is clear, the application only stores multiple unit of measure values. After you select this
inventory balances using a base unit of measure. This check box is not check box, you can only clear this check box if no
available if the part is serial tracked. inventory balances exist for the part.
8. If you want, select the Track Serial Numbers check box to indicate
serial numbers are tracked for this part. Parts assigned serial numbers can be tracked individually by order, job, inventory, and
return material authorization (RMA)/discrepant material report (DMR).

9. Select the Costing Method you want to use for calculating the cost of For more information on Costing Methods, review
this part. The selected costing method determines which calculation the the Job Costing Technical Reference Guide. This
application uses whenever it retrieves a unit cost (the usage cost of one guide is available within application help. Using the
part) for this part record. The costing method defined within the application help table of contents, navigate to the
Company Configuration program displays by default, but you can Job Management > Working With node to
override this value on individual part records (and also Part-Plant display this guide.
records). Available methods:

• Average Cost – Calculates a weighted average of all receipt costs for this part.

• FIFO – An abbreviation for First In First Out. This method assumes the next quantity to be issued or shipped from stock is the
oldest quantity stored within the warehouse. As long as a quantity remains from the original received quantity, the application
uses this cost value until the entire quantity from the original receipt is consumed.

• Last Cost – Calculates the most recent receipt cost for this part.

• Lot Average Cost – Calculates an average cost of all parts in a lot. This value is the total cost divided by the total quantity for
all parts within a lot.

• Lot FIFO – Determines the cost of all parts in a lot by using the FIFO costing method described above.

• Standard Cost – Calculates a set cost you establish and enter for this part. You define and update the standard cost for each
part within the Costing Workbench.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 493

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

10. Select the Non-Stock Item check

box to indicate this part is not
normally stocked in inventory.
Both purchased and manufactured
parts can be either stocked or
non-stocked. If you enter non-
stocked parts in your part records,
their default descriptions are
supplied (just like stocked items)
when you enter their part
numbers on an order or a job.

If a part is not defined as non-

stock, then all requirements come
from stock and the part is 11
controlled through minimum,
maximum, and safety stock
settings.

If a manufactured part is non- 10

stocked, then each time a sales
order creates a requirement for
this part, the part is listed in
manufacturing suggestions and
is produced and shipped from
the job. If a purchased part is
non-stocked, then each time a
job creates a requirement for
this part, the part is listed in
purchasing suggestions and is
purchased and received directly
to the job.

11. Selecting the Track Serial Numbers check box activates the S/N Format button. Click this button to define how serial numbers
are tracked for this selected part.

12. The Serial Number Format window displays.

13. Indicate the Base Number Structure you want the serial numbers for this part to use. Available options:

• Numeric Only – Serial numbers generate only using numeric characters.

• Alphanumeric – Serial numbers generate using both alphabetic and numeric characters.

• Serial Mask – Serial numbers are created using a serial mask. Serial masks are created using Serial Mask Maintenance; this
program is described within the Epicor ERP Implementation Guide.

14. If you select either the Numeric Only or Alphanumeric options, the Prefix field activates. Depending on your selection, use this
field to enter either a numeric or alphanumeric set of characters. This value is used as the starting characters for each generated
serial number.

494 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

15. If you select the Numeric

Only option, the fields 12
within the Numeric Only 23
Options section activate. Use
these fields to define the
Number of Digits 13
available for each serial
number and indicate if these 14
numbers can use Leading
Zeros.
15
16. If you select the Serial
Mask option, the Serial Mask
button activates. Use this
button to find and select 16
a serial mask; this mask is
used to define how serial 17
numbers generate for this
part.
18
17. The Serial Mask Type 19
options indicate whether this
serial mask is a Validation or 20
a Generation type. The type 21
selected defined on the serial
mask record displays; you
cannot change this value.

18. If the serial mask is a 22

Generation type, the Mask
Prefix field is available. Enter
the value you want in this
field; all serial numbers for this part start with this value.

19. If the serial mask is a Generation type, the Mask Suffix field is available. Enter the value you want in this field; all serial numbers
for this part end with this value.

20. Optionally, select the Use Serial Mask Starting Sequence check box. This indicates you want to use the starting sequence
defined on the serial mask record.

21. However, if you clear the Use Serial Mask, the Starting Sequence field activates. Use this field to enter the starting sequence
value you want for serial numbers generated through this mask.

22. When you finish defining the serial number structure, click OK.

23. Click Close to exit the window. As activity is placed against this part record, serial numbers generate for the part quantities. You
use the Serial Matching and Serial Number Tracker programs to both review and fine-tune this activity. These programs are
explored within the Serial Number Tools section later in this chapter.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 495

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

Multiple Units of Measure

Use the UOMs sheet to view unit of measure (UOM) information, and enter
conversion factor, net volume, and product code information for the current For more information about this functionality, review
part. Leverage the Detail sheet to view the details for each assigned UOM the Epicor ERP Implementation Guide reference.
code.

To use this functionality:

1. The UOM Code and

Description fields display the
identifier and concise
explanation for the UOM
code. 7

2. Use the Conversion Factor

6
value to calculate the
conversion between the UOM
code and the Base UOM code 1
for the UOM Class selected 2
for the current part. This field
is available if the Part Specific 3
check box is selected for the
4
UOM code within UOM Class
Maintenance. In this case, the
Part Specific check box is 5
selected on this Part
Maintenance > UOMs sheet
and cannot be changed.

3. The Track on Hand check

box indicates if the application
tracks inventory balances
within the current UOM code.
Depending on whether the
Track Multiple UOMs check box is selected on the Part > Detail sheet, different options are available:

• If the Track Multiple UOMs check box is cleared, this check box is not available. This indicates the inventory balances for the
part are only tracked using the Primary UOM – Inventory value assigned to the part.

• If the Track Multiple UOMs check box is selected, this check box is available. If you then select this check box on this sheet, it
indicates this UOM code can be used when placing orders and storing inventory. If you clear this check box, you cannot use
this UOM for orders or inventory.VENTOR

4. Enter the Unit Net Volume for an inventory unit of this current part when it is selected on the Fulfillment Workbench. After you
define this numeric value, select the Volume UOM from the drop-down list that represents the unit of measure for the volume
of this part. The default value is defined within Company Configuration.

This value is multiplied against the Primary UOMs – Inventory unit of measure to calculate the volume for the part quantity within
the Fulfillment Workbench. For example, if you select Feet for the part’s Primary UOMs – Inventory field, enter 50.50 in the Unit
Net Volume field, and select Cubic Inches as the Volume UOM, then one foot unit of this item equals 50.5 cubic inches.

5. The Product Codes section displays the specific codes you want to use with this unit of measure. Product codes are unique
registered numbers that identify a specific part and a UOM. An example of a product code is the standard UPC-12 barcode
found on most consumer items purchased in the US and Canada. You can also enter EAN-13, EAN-14, EAN-8, and GTIN-14
product codes. Each product code is used in different regions of the world, but all are similar to the UPC code. Instead of
entering an actual part number within a Part field, you can instead enter or scan these codes into the application.

If you enter or scan one of the codes in a part field, the application replaces it with the internal part number and the correct
UOM. You can also print the appropriate product code on transaction documents, such as a Picklist document.

6. Use the List sheet to navigate and select all the unit of measure records available for the current part.

7. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

496 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

Lot Tracking
When a part is enabled for Lot Tracking, you can create and define lot details for each lot used to track the part. You first define the
attributes of the lot; these values indicate what additional inputs are required when a new lot is created or used for the current part.
You then define the parameters you want if you want to automatically generate lot numbers. With these values in place, you can then
create as many lot numbers you need for the current part.

This section details the process you follow for creating and assigning lot numbers to the current part.

Lot Attributes

Lot attributes store number and date information you can track at the lot level. They define requirements needed before a lot is used
for tracking. You can display them on specific reports, labels, and search programs.

The default lot attributes are defined with Company Configuration, but if you need, you can override these values on a specific part
record. Select the attributes you want to use with each lot number generated for the current part.

To define lot attributes for the current part:

1. Navigate to the Lots >

Attributes sheet.

2. Select the Batch check box to

indicate a batch number is 11
required.

3. Select the MFG Batch check 1

box to indicate a
manufacturing batch number 2 7
is required.
3 8
4. Select the MFG Lot check 4 9
box to indicate a
manufacturer’s lot number is 5 10
required. 6
5. Select the Heat Number
check box to indicate a heat
number is required.

6. Select the Firmware check

box to indicate a firmware
number is required.

7. Select the Best Before Date to indicate this date is required.

8. Select the Original Mfg Date to indicate an original manufacturing date is required.

9. Select the Cure Date to indicate a cure date is required.

10. Select the Expire Date to indicate an expiration date is required.

11. When you finish defining lot attributes, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Lot Generation Parameters

Leverage the Lots > Generate sheet to define the parameters you want to use for generating lot number strings for the specified part.
When you use the Next Lot button for this part within various programs, the lot number is generated using the parameters you define
on this sheet.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 497

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

To define automatic lot number parameters:

1. Navigate to the Lots >

Generate sheet.

2. Use the Prefix field to define

the characters or numbers to
assign as leading characters 10
for the lot numbers. Enter any
alphanumeric characters you
need.
1 2
3. Click the Trailing Date
3
String drop-down list to
select the structure you want.
This string is added to the end 4
6
of each generated lot 5
number. A number of options
are available like date, month, 8
date/month/year, and so on. 9 7
You can also select formats
that separate these values
with hyphens.

4. The Non Part Specific check

box indicates how the
sequential lot number is
assigned during lot number
generation. Selecting or
clearing this check box activates different related fields; the next steps explain these options.

5. Clear the Non Part Specific check box to indicate the next lot number is generated on a part-specific basis. Enter a numeric value
within the Next Number field. When the application generates a new lot number for this part, the next number available from
this starting value is used for the lot number.

6. Select the Non Part Specific check box to activate the Global Lot
You create sequence records within Global Lot
Sequence drop-down list. When the application generates a new lot
Sequence Maintenance. To navigate to this program:
number for this part, the next sequence number available within this
Material Management > Inventory Management >
code you selected from the drop-down list is used for the lot number.
Setup > Global Lot Sequence
7. Optionally, you can limit the Number Of Digits available for the
serialized integer section of the lot number. Enter a numeric value in this field.

8. Select the Leading Zeroes check box to indicate you want additional zeros added in front of the trailing date string.

9. The Next generated lot will be field displays the format structure you defined.

10. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Country of Origin
Use the Country of Origin functionality to designate the countries in which the current part was manufactured. You also indicate how
much of the part was created within a country based on either the quantity or the value of its raw materials.

Some European countries require you report the countries of origin and percentage breakdowns when part quantities are received
from other European Union countries. Typically this information is required to print on the product labels. The information you enter in
this sheet are the default values for the part, but you can override these default values on a specific shipment.

498 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

To add a Country of Origin to the current part:

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New 1
button; select New Country
of Origin.

2. The Country of Origin >

Detail sheet displays.

3. Select the Country of Origin

you need for this part. You
create these records within 2 3
Country Maintenance. 4
4. Enter the Quantity Percent 5
value for this country of
6
origin. This value indicates
how much of the part is
manufactured or gathered
within this country. For
example, you manufacture
breaded shrimp. You purchase
the breading from France. By
weight, the breading makes
up about 60% of the
product, while the shrimp
makes up 40%. You enter 60
within the Quantity Percent field.

5. Enter the Value Percent you need for this country of origin. This If you are creating multiple countries of origin, the
percentage indicates how much of the value of the product is created quantity and value percentages must total 100%.
within the current country of origin. Using the breaded shrimp example, If these values do not total 100%,
the shrimp represents 90% of the final value of the product, while the an error message displays.
breading represents 10%. You enter 10% in this field.

6. Select the Primary check box to indicate this country is the main source for this part. You can only select one country of origin
as the primary source.

Plants
The Plant > Detail sheet (and subordinate sheets) contain default warehouse, warehouse bin and inventory information for each part
in a specified plant. Using the Warehouses > Detail or Warehouses > Bin Information sheets, you can define Initial / Minimum,
Threshold / Safety, Maximum and Replenish / Kanban used by the Replenishment Workbench, and in Kanban processing at the
warehouse (or warehouse bin) levels. You use the Cycle Count sheet to define cycle counting parameters for each part-plant record.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 499

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

To add a new plant to the current part:

1
1. Click the Down Arrow
next to the New button;
select New Plant.
2
2. The Plants > Detail sheet
displays.

3. Select the Plant you need 3

from the drop-down list.
4
4. Select the Primary 5
Warehouse you use to store
this part from the drop-down
list. 9

5. If you need, select the

Costing Method you use for 6
the parts manufactured in this 7
plant. The available costing
methods are explored in the 8
previous Part Inventory Details
section. 10

6. Enter the Min On-Hand value

for this part-plant record. This
value indicates the smallest
quantity that needs to be
available within this plant.

7. Enter the Max On-Hand value for this part-plant record. This value indicates the largest quantity that can be stored within this
plant.MANAGEMENT

8. Enter the Safety Stock you need for this part. This quantity provides a value to help prevent unforeseen issues with the
inventory quantity. The Time Phased Material Requirements report notifies you when a part quantity is forecasted to go below
this number.

9. You can optionally specify buyer, minimum order quantity, lead time, forecast time, supplier, Generate PO suggestions, Buy To
Order, and Drop Ship Item overrides within the Purchasing section. These parameters apply when you purchase the part for the
specified plant and override the same parameters defined at the part level for the plant within Plant Configuration Control.

10. If you select the Allow Consumption of Minimum Qty check box on the plant record, you can define Urgent Planning
options. These options are an alternate set of values available when you generate PO suggestions. If the projected On-Hand
Quantity falls below the Safety Stock quantity during the lead time date range (MRP Scheduled Start Date + Lead Time), the
Urgent Planning values are used instead to calculate the PO suggestion quantities. Through these parameters, you can define the
specific quantities, lead times, and suppliers to use for immediate supply needs.

500 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

11. You can add 11

additional
warehouses to this part-
plant record. To do this,
click the Down Arrow
next to the New button;
select New Warehouse.
12
12. The Warehouses >
Detail sheet displays. 13

13. Notice you can select a

different Warehouse on
this sheet. 14

14. You can also specify the

Replenishment Type
and bin replenishment
parameters (Initial /
Minimum, Threshold /
Safety, Maximum and
Replenish / Kanban
quantities) for this
warehouse. If you specify
a Kanban-related
Replenishment type,
you also designate the
supply warehouse/bin,
plant and PO/line
material source for the
part in the designated
warehouse.

These values override the values you defined on the Plants > Detail sheet. Use these fields if you need to define these values at the
warehouse level.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 501

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

15. You can also define 15

warehouse bins for
this current
warehouse. To do 19
this, click the Down
Arrow next to the New
button; select New
16
Warehouse Bin.

16. The Bin Information >

Detail sheet displays.
17
17. Notice you can select a
Bin linked to the current
warehouse on this sheet.

18. You can also specify the

Replenishment Type
and associated bin
replenishment
parameters (Initial /
Minimum, Threshold / 18
Safety, Maximum and
Replenish / Kanban
quantities) for this
warehouse bin. If you
specify a Kanban-related
Replenishment type,
you also designate the
supply warehouse/bin,
plant and PO/line
material source for the
part in the designated warehouse bin. These values override the values you defined on the Warehouses > Detail sheet. Use these
fields if you need to define these values at the bin level.

19. Continue to add the plants you need and define the inventory requirements for all levels within the bin. When you finish, click
Save on the Standard toolbar.

Part Class
Part Class Maintenance categorizes and organizes your parts. Part classes are Typically, part classes are created when you first
primarily used for reporting purposes. They also hold information about groups of implement the application. Usually these codes
parts you use within inventory. For example, Is inspection necessary for these parts are determined by individuals representing
when they are received?, Can purchase order requisitions be entered?, Which buyer accounting, purchasing, and manufacturing
is responsible for this part?, or What action should be taken when there is negative personnel.
inventory?

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Part Class

502 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

To create a new part class:

1. Click New on the Standard

toolbar. 1
2. Enter a Part Class code and a
Description. 6 7
8
3. Select a Buyer for this part
class.
2
4. Click the Approved
Suppliers button to find and 3
select which suppliers can sell
4
you parts through this part
class.
5
5. Select the Negative
Quantity Action the
application should do when
transactions against this class
cause the on-hand quantity of
any parts linked to this class
to result in a negative
quantity. Available options:

• Warn - A warning message displays, but processing can continue

• Stop - An error message displays, and processing cannot continue

• None - No messages display

6. The Plant sheet establishes planning parameters for a specified part class and plant combination. These parameters apply to all
parts linked to the current part class. You can override these parameters within part-plant details within Part Maintenance.

7. Access the GL Control sheets to determine the accounts and journal codes used to post transactions against the current
warehouse. You can associate one or more GL controls with a warehouse; however, each control linked to the warehouse must
belong to a different control type.

8. When you finish creating your part class, click Save.

Part Cross References

Use the Part Cross References functionality to create relationships between different part numbers defined for the same product.
Customers, suppliers, and internal users may use different part numbers to identify the same part. You can define part cross references
as you need for all of these situations. This section first describes the different use cases for this functionality and then describes how
to implement this feature set.INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 1

Supply Side Cross Reference

Suppliers often use different part numbers for the parts you purchase. These parts may also be produced through another
manufacturer who then provides the supplier (usually a distributor) with these materials; these parts can also use different part
numbers.

To accommodate this business need, you can control parts by linking unique part numbers for suppliers and their qualified
manufacturers – using the same part record. You can then create RFQs, supplier price lists, and purchase orders that use these unique
identifiers – while at the same time you place these transactions against the same part record.

To leverage this functionality, you must first create a list of potential manufacturers, the life cycle for each part, and the qualified
manufacturer records. You can then link them when you create supplier part records.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 503

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

Demand Side Cross Reference

Customers often use different part numbers for the same parts you sell to them. Your customers may also have specific serial format
requirements for these parts. To accommodate this business need, you can control parts by linking together unique part numbers for
customers, for serial tracked parts, and optionally assign alternate serial masks. You can then create sales orders using the customer
part. When you create a job for this customer part, you can then apply the alternate serial mask format to the manufactured parts.

To leverage this functionality, you must create customer parts.

Internal Cross Reference

Internal users may need to create their own identifiers for parts in order to simplify data entry or create variations in the part. To
accommodate this business need, you can control parts by linking unique part numbers for internal use, for serial tracked parts, and
optionally assign alternate serial masks. When you create a job for the Internal Part Cross Reference, the alternate serial mask format is
applied to the manufactured parts.

To leverage this functionality, you must create internal part cross references.

Internal Part Cross References

Use Internal Part Cross Reference Maintenance to create cross references for a specific part number. These values are primarily used in
Part fields as shortcuts for data entry. For example, you can create an internal cross reference of EPR-100 for an internal part number
of EPRD-100-SL-MRP. When users enter sales orders for this part, they can enter EPR-100 and the application automatically replaces it
with the normal internal part number.

You can also create alternate serial number masks for use during Job Entry. When the cross reference populates the job, the alternate
serial mask is used.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Internal Part Cross Reference

To use this program:

1. Click the Part Number button to

find and select the part number 4
you want to cross reference. You can
also enter the part number directly.
11 1 3
2. The Description from the part
record displays. 2

3. If the Serial Tracked check box is

selected, it indicates that this part 5
number is recorded on transactions
using serial numbers. 6

4. To create a new cross reference, click

New on the Standard toolbar.
8
5. Enter the Internal Cross Reference 7
you want for the part number. 9
6. Now enter the Description you want to 10
display when this internal cross
reference is selected.

7. If the part and plant records are serial number controlled and the format is a serial mask, you can optionally select an alternate
serial mask for this internal cross reference. Either enter the mask directly or click the Serial Masks button to find and select the
mask you want.

8. The Serial Number Format from the mask displays in this field.

9. If you need, enter a different Mask Prefix value.

10. Optionally, you can also enter a different Mask Suffix value.

11. Continue to add the internal part cross references you need. When you finish, click Save.

504 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

Manufacturers and Lifecycle Statuses

You also create two types of records that are later used to define qualified manufacturers. These records are manufacturers and
lifecycle statuses.

Manufacturers

Use Manufacturer Maintenance to create manufacturer records. Only create manufacturer records for organizations who do not
directly supply materials to your company. You later use these records to create part cross references for qualified manufacturers.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Manufacturer

To create a new record:

1. Click New on the Standard toolbar.

2. Enter the Manufacturer identifier 1

you need. This value displays within
other programs and reports.
5
3. Enter the Name of the manufacturer.
This value displays on drop-down lists in
other programs. 2

4. If you no longer want this manufacturer

3
to be available within other programs,
select the Inactive check box. This 4
record will not display on drop-down
lists throughout the application. This
check box is available only if this manufacturer is not selected as a qualified manufacturer.

5. When you finish, click Save.

Lifecycle Statuses

You create lifecycle status codes within Life Cycle Status Maintenance. A lifecycle status code defines the point at which a
manufacturer’s part is at its useful period. For example, lifecycle codes within the electronics manufacturing industry include
Introduction, New Product, Rapid Growth, Maturity, Saturation, Not Recommended, Phase Out, and so on.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Lifecycle

To create a new lifecycle status:

1. Click New on the Standard toolbar.

2. Enter the Life Cycle Status 1

identifier. This value displays within
other programs and reports. In this
example, you enter Maturity. 6

3. Enter the Description you want for 2 4

this lifecycle status. In this example,
you enter Maturity.
3
4. One lifecycle status must be selected as
5
the Default. Select this check box to
assign the current lifecycle status as the
default. This lifecycle status automatically displays on the Life Cycle Status drop-down list within Qualified Manufacturer
Maintenance.

5. Select the Inactive check box to prevent this lifecycle status from being selected within Qualified Manufacturer Maintenance.
The status no longer displays on the Life Cycle Status drop-down list.

6. When you finish, click Save.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 505

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

Qualified Manufacturers
Use Qualified Manufacturer Maintenance to link a manufacturer with a specific internal part. You can indicate that multiple
manufacturers are qualified for a part. You can also define one or more cross-reference part numbers for each manufacturer.

Typically you use these records for organizations which do not directly supply part quantities to your company. While your engineers
design products, they often test a variety of manufacturer’s parts for form, fit, and function. Qualified manufacturer parts are verified
to have equal form, fit, or function possibilities and are interchangeable within a specific area within a product design.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Qualified Manufacturer

To create a new qualified manufacturer record:

1. Click the Part Number button to

find and select the internal part 3
number you need.

2. After you select the part, its

Description displays in the 1
accompanying field. You cannot 2
change this value.

3. Click the Down Arrow next to the

New button; select New Qualified
Manufacturer.

4. Click the Manufacturer button to find

and select the manufacturer you want
to link, or qualify, with the selected
6
part. Users can now search for this
identifier within RFQs and purchase
orders. 7
5. The Name of the manufacturer
displays for your information.

6. Optionally you can now add one or

more manufacturer’s parts qualified for
this manufacturer. To do this, click the 4
Down Arrow next to the New 5
button.

7. Select New Qualified Manufacturer

Part.

506 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

8. The Manufacture Part > Detail

sheet displays. 12
9. Enter the Manufacturer’s Part
number used by this manufacturer to
define this internal part.

10. Select the Life Cycle Status for this

part. The default status displays
automatically, but you can click the 8
drop-down list to select a different
status.
9
11. Use the Market Availability field,
enter either how long this product is 10
available or how long it typically takes
to purchase the material in the 11
marketplace. This value is for your
information and is not used in any
calculations.

12. Continue to add any additional

manufacturer’s part numbers you need.
When you finish, click Save on the
Standard toolbar.

Part Cross References in Action

You can now use the part cross references within specific programs that are key to maintaining your supply chain. This section
describes where you use part cross references. The following example demonstrates a Supply Side use case scenario.

RFQ Entry

When you create a detail line on a new Request for Quote (RFQ), you can select a specific manufacturer’s part number to include
with it.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Supplier Relationship Management > General Operations > RFQ Entry

To select a part cross reference for an RFQ:

1. Create a new RFQ on the Detail

sheet. 9

For more information on 2 1

creating an RFQ, review RFQ
Entry in Chapter 15: Purchasing. 3

2. After creating the RFQ, click the Down

Arrow next to the New button; select 3
New Line.

3. Click the Part button to find and select 5 4 6

a part that has part cross references.

4. The part cross references display within

the Manufacturer’s Parts to be
Quoted grid. All the cross references
available for the current part display on
7
this grid.
8
5. The Manufacturer identifier and
Name values display within their
respective columns.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 507

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

6. The Manufacturer’s Part Number displays within its own column.

7. If you want to keep this part number on this RFQ detail line, select the Include check box.

8. If you want to remove a cross reference part number from this RFQ detail line, clear the Include check box.

9. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Supplier Response and / or Supplier Price List

When a supplier responds to a quote or sends pricing for a part, you can record the pricing values. Suppliers frequently include their
supplier part values as they also need to map these numbers to their Qualified Manufacturer or Manufacturer’s Parts records.

The following steps describe this process:

1. Enter the supplier pricing and create a new supplier part.

2. Enter the supplier part number and then select the Qualified Manufacturing/Manufacturing part values to link them
together. You can do this task from within both the Supplier Price List and the Approved Supplier Maintenance programs.
Approved Supplier Maintenance is discussed in the next section.

3. Select this supplier within Purchase Order Entry.

4. When you select the manufacturer’s part cross reference number, the Within Purchase Order Entry, you can select
supplier’s part number displays as well.VNTORY MANAGEMENT Qualified Manufacturing/Manufacturing parts
even if you have not defined supplier parts.

Approved Supplier Maintenance

In addition to the Supplier Price List, supplier parts can also be maintained from within Approved Supplier Maintenance. A supplier can
be defined as a distributor for a qualified manufacturer. Each qualified manufacturer can then be linked to a part cross reference
number.

You can launch this program from several locations. During this example, you launch Approved Supplier Maintenance within Part
Maintenance.

Here’s how:

1. Select the part record you want to

update on the Part > Detail sheet. 2

2. From the Actions menu, select

Approved Suppliers.

508 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

3. The Approved Supplier Maintenance 3

window displays. 7
4. Because you launched this program within Part
Maintenance, the Part Number and
Description automatically display.

5. Review the Type value. In order to use 6

part cross referencing, this drop-down list
must display the Part option.

6. Click the Supplier button to find and select

the specific supplier you want to approve.

7. Optionally, enter a new Supplier Part. This

value is the identifier used by the supplier.
Click the Down Arrow next to the New
button; select New Supplier Part.

8. On the Supplier Parts > Detail sheet, select

the Default for Purchases check box
when you want the current supplier 12
part to be the default option. Only one
supplier part can be selected as the default
supplier part value.

9. Now select the manufacturer you want linked

to this supplier part. To do this, click the
Manufacturer drop-down list to select an
option.

10. The part cross references available for the

selected manufacturer display on the
Manufacturer’s Part drop-down list. Select 8
the part number you want associated with the
current supplier part. 9

11. The Life Cycle Status and Market 10

Availability fields display the values you
entered within Qualified Manufacturer
Maintenance. These values display for your 11
information; you cannot edit them.

12. Continue to add the supplier parts you need

for the current approved supplier. When you
finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 509

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

Now when you use this approved supplier within Purchase Order Entry and select the manufacturer’s part cross reference number, the
supplier’s part number displays as well.

Demand Side Use Case

You first create a job by entering a customer part number linked to a serial tracked part. An alternate mask is also linked to that part.
When serial numbers are created for this job, the alternate mask format is applied to them.

Internal Side Use Case

You first create a job by entering an Internal Part number linked to a serial tracked part. An alternate mask is also linked to that part.
When serial numbers are created for this job, the alternate mask format is applied to them.

Operations
This section describes the operations available in the Inventory module. Each operation is described as a workflow to help guide you
through the process from start to finish. These programs are primarily found within the General Operations folder for this module. If a
unique setup record is required to run the operation, this record is also described in this section.

Issue Material from Inventory

One of the main transactions you do within inventory is issue materials and assemblies to jobs. Once a job is created (refer to Chapter
12: Job Management), you need to satisfy the demand for material requirements. You order purchased materials and then receive
either to the job or to stock - or as a miscellaneous item. Once received, then all materials (purchased or manufactured) are issued to
the demand source individually (by part number) or through a mass issue based on the job pick list.

Print the Job Pick List

To begin issuing materials to a job, you first print the Job Pick list. The Job Pick List displays the material needed and includes the
warehouse and bin where the material quantity is located. This list assists you in locating and physically pulling the part quantities you
need from inventory. In case you need to update the warehouse or bin information, you can record the actual warehouse and bin
from where you pulled the material quantity directly on the report.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Reports > Job Pick List

1. Select the Include Purchased

Materials check box to
indicate you want this
information to display on the
report.

2. Select the Print Bar Codes

check box to cause the report
to display bar codes as well. 1
2

510 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

3. Select the Filter > Job sheet

to select materials for a
specific job to display on the
report.

4. Click the Job button to

find and select a job to 3 6
print.
5
5. Use the Assembly sheet to 4
select materials for a specific
assembly to display on the
report.

6. Click Print on the Standard

toolbar.

Mass Issue Material

Use the Mass Issue functionality to quickly issue all planned materials to a job, Run this program if your material estimates are fairly
instead of issuing each material individually. When you issue transactions accurate. This program works best with any job
generated in this way, you reduce inventory quantities and post material costs material that you do not lot or serial track.
to jobs.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Mass Issue to Mfg

To mass issue job material:

1. In the Job field, enter the job

number.

2. If the Tree View on the left

indicates this job includes
subassemblies, you may
choose to issue for the top
level assembly or all
subassemblies. Select the 1
Include Subassemblies
check box to issue all material 2
for this job.
3
3. Click the Issue button.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 511

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

4. When the Issue > List sheet displays,

click the Issue All button.

5. Click OK. This issues all material from

6
the primary bin and warehouse.

6. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

5 4
By scrolling to the right,
you can view the
warehouse and bin as well
as the quantity being
issued. The warehouse,
bin, or the quantities can
be changed if necessary.

Issue Job Material

Job material can be issued individually using the Issue Material program. This issue method is preferred for lot or serial tracked parts.
You can also issue an assembly from inventory to a job using the Issue Assembly program. This program is discussed in the next
section.

When you issue material to a job, two events occur. First, the Issued Quantity and Total Cost values on the job material or assembly
record update with the issued quantity and the Extended Cost. The Extended Cost is calculated by multiplying the issued quantity
against the costing method used for the part – either Average, Standard, Last, or FIFO. Second, the current On-Hand Quantity and
Allocated Quantity values for the part are reduced by the issued quantity.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Issue Material

To issue job material individually:

1. In the Job field, enter the job number.

2. Click the Assembly drop-down list to

select the correct assembly level.

3. Click the Mtl drop-down list to select

the correct material.
1
4. Enter the Quantity to be issued.
2
5. If the item being issued is lot
3
controlled, in the Lot field, enter a lot
number.

6. If the part is serial tracked, you can

click the Serial Numbers button to
select the serial numbers used with the 4 5
issued quantity.

7. Click OK to complete the transaction.

7 6

512 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

8. Notice the material issued and

the quantity now display in
the Tree View.
8
INVENTORY MANAGEMENT |
CHAPTER 12

Issue Assemblies

Assemblies are issued when the job assembly is specified as a pull quantity from stock. Because the demand is for a sub-assembly part,
a pull quantity is different than a typical material requirement. Some of the quantity is manufactured through a job, while the rest of
the quantity is pulled from stock. This stock quantity may be the result of overproduction on another job.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Issue Assembly

To issue assemblies:

1. Click the Job button to find

and select the job to which
you are going to issue the
assembly. You can also enter
the job number directly.

2. Enter the Quantity to issue.

1
3. If the part is lot tracked, you
can click the Lot Number
button to find and select the
lot you need.

4. If the part is serial tracked,

you can click the Serial
Numbers button to select the
serial numbers used with the 2 3
issued quantity.

5. Click OK to complete the

transaction.
5 4

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 513

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

6. The Issued Complete check

box is now selected,
indicating the issue is
complete.

After you issue an assembly to a

job and select another assembly to
issue to the same job, the Work List
in the program’s Tree View clears
information from the previous
assembly and replaces it with the 6
new assembly.

If you would like to view all of your

issue transactions for all assemblies
in the Work List at the same time,
click the Job button to launch Job
Search. From the search results, pull
in all the job assemblies that you
would like to issue. All selected
assemblies display in the Work List;
you can then navigate among them
to enter the issue transactions.

Issue Miscellaneous Materials

You can use the Issue Miscellaneous Material program to issue miscellaneous When you issue miscellaneous parts, a transaction
parts from inventory. For example, you would do this if a manager needs to take history record is created with the transaction type
a sample item to a trade show. of STK-UKN. For more information on transaction
codes, review the Transaction Types topic within
Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management >
application help.
General Operations > Issue Miscellaneous Material

To issue miscellaneous material:

1. Click the Part button to find

and select the part number
you need. You can also enter
the part number directly.

2. Enter the Quantity you want

to issue.
1
3. In the Reference field, enter a
2
comment. The information
you enter in this field is 3
recorded in the part
transaction history file. 4 6
4. Select a Reason code for this
5
miscellaneous issue. The
reason code defines the
8 7
offsetting general ledger
controls affected by this
transaction.

514 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

5. Enter the Warehouse and Bin from which you issued the part. The part’s default warehouse and bin display, but if you need,
you can override these options.

6. If the part is lot tracked, you can click the Lot Number button to find and select the lot you need.

7. If the part is serial tracked, you can click the Serial Numbers button to select the serial numbers used with the issued quantity.

8. When you finish, click OK.

INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 12

Receive Material into Inventory

Materials can also be received into inventory. For example, manufactured jobs can be received into inventory, or materials can be
returned to stock if a customer cancels an order where the material has already been issued to the job.

Return Miscellaneous Material

Use the Return Miscellaneous Material program to return items to inventory that have been removed through the Issue Miscellaneous
Materials program. Building on the previous example, the manager returns from the trade show and uses the Return Miscellaneous
Materials program to return the sample item back into inventory.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Return Miscellaneous Material

To return miscellaneous material:

1. Click the Part button to find and select

the part number you need. You can
also enter the part number directly.

2. Enter the Quantity you need to return

to inventory.

3. Optionally, enter a Reference for the 1

return. The information you enter in 2
this field is recorded in the part 6
transaction history file. 3
5
4
4. Select a Reason code for the returned 7
item. The reason code defines the 8
offsetting general ledger controls
affected by this transaction.

5. The default Warehouse and Bin for

the returned quantity displays by
default. If you need, however, you can
select a different warehouse and bin.

6. If the part is lot tracked, you can click

the Lot Number button to find and
select the lot you need.

7. If the part is serial tracked, you can click the Serial Numbers button to select the serial numbers used with the received quantity.

8. When you finish, click OK.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 515

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

Job Receipt to Inventory

Use the Job Receipt to Inventory program to enter the receipt of manufactured parts into inventory.

When you receive manufactured parts to inventory, several inventory transactions run. The part’s On-Hand Quantity in the part record
updates. The Average, FIFO, and Last cost values also update. Additionally, a transaction history record is created for the part with the
job reference.

You do not have to receive parts to inventory before you ship them; for example, you can ship directly out of Work in Process (WIP).
Only receive items to inventory if you are building standard products or if you have overruns or spare parts you are not able to ship
right away.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Job Receipt to Inventory

To receive job material into inventory:

1. In the From Job field, enter the

number of the job you want to receive.

2. If the job has more than one assembly,

select the assembly you want to receive
against in the Assembly field. If the
job only has one assembly, this field 1
displays a zero (0) and you cannot 2 5
select it.
3
3. Enter the Quantity to receive. 4
4. The Plant, the Warehouse, and the
Bin values for the part display by
default, but if you need, you can
change these values. 7

5. If the part is lot tracked, you can use

the Lot and the Next Lot buttons to 6
define which lot is receiving the parts.

6. If the part is serial tracked, you can

click the Serial Numbers button to define the serial numbers used with the received quantity.

7. When you finish, click OK.

Replenishment Workbench
The Replenishment Workbench contains methods which facilitate material replentishment for supply chain and distribution business
flows. The Automatic, Manual, and Managed methods track stock-to-stock supply between specific warehouses and bins.

To determine replenishment requirements, the Automatic and Manual replenishment methods use parameters you define at the part
warehouse or bin levels. The Automatic method continually monitors inventory balance levels, automatically generating move requests
when eventory quantities change in warehouse and bin locations. Through the Manual method, you view proposed move requests
and manually generate the actual move requests.

However, through the Managed method, you create "on-the-fly" move requests for parts without replenishment parameters, or parts
linked to part classes or product codes that have no parameters. You can view these replenishment move requests in the
Replenishment Workbench > Moves sheet, the Material Request Queue, or in the Material Queue Manager, located on the Advanced
Material Management General Operations menu.

516 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

Use the Replenishment Workbench to distribute Manual and Managed move

You can also view move requests in the Material
requests. You also leverage this program to review previously generated move
Request Queue and the Material Queue Manager.
requests. This program can be used with Kanban processing to complete a
These programs are located in the Advanced
supply-to-replenish synchronized flow.
Material Management module in the General
Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Operations folder.
General Operations > Replenishment Workbench

Manual Replenishment
To generate manual replenishment move requests:
1. Navigate to the Manual
sheet.

2. Click the To Warehouse

1
drop-down list to select 6
the warehouse for which 4
replenishment move 2 7
requests will be manually 5
generated. 3
8
3. To perform bin level
replenishment for the
specified warehouse, use
the To Bin Type, the To
Zone, and the To Bin
Range fields to specify
the destination
warehouse zone, bin 11 9 10 12
types and warehouse bins
for which replenishment
calculations are being
performed. To perform
warehouse level
replenishment only for
the specified warehouse,
leave these fields blank.

4. Optionally, select the Include Auto Replenishment check box to specify Automatic replenishment requests generated by the
Epicor application should also display in the Replenishment Moves grid.

5. Optionally, select the Include Supplier Managed check box to specify if supplier-managed bins should also be included as a
source of supply for replenishment materials.

6. Click the Mode drop-down list to select the type of replenishment quantity calculation (Fill to Maximum or Use
Replenishment Quantity) that should be performed when generating manual replenishment move requests.

7. Select the Include Above Maximum, the Include Above Minimum, the Include Above Threshold, and the Include Below
Threshold check boxes as needed to view replenishment move requests candidates based on various processing parameters. The
application compares the calculated inventory balances for parts in the destination warehouse (or warehouse bin) to
replenishment parameters you have defined at the part warehouse or part warehouse bin levels.

8. Click Retrieve to select and display replenishment move transaction request candidates that match the specified warehouse and
type criteria.

9. To calculate the available supply inventory quantity for display in the Avail field, use the Select check box to indicate for which
rows you want to calculate the replenishment transactions. After you select the rows, click the Calculate Available button.

10. Using the Move Qty field, review the proposed move quantities for each of the proposed replenishment move requests. You can
override the move quantity for each transaction row as needed.

11. Click the Select All button to indicate move requests need to generate for all the current transaction rows.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 517

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

12. Click the Generate Moves button to generate actual replenishment move requests for the replenishment transaction rows
selected in the Replenishment Moves grid.

Managed Replenishment
To perform Managed material replenishment:

1. Navigate to the Managed >

Criteria sheet.

2. Click the To Warehouse 1

drop-down list to select the
warehouse for which
replenishment move requests 2
are being created.
3 5
3. To perform bin level 4
replenishment for the
6
specified warehouse, use the
To Bin Type, the To Zone,
and the To Bin Range fields
to specify the destination
warehouse zone, bin types
and warehouse bins for which
replenishment calculations are
9 7 8 10
being performed. To perform
warehouse level
replenishment only for the
specified warehouse, leave
these fields blank.

4. Optionally, select the Include Supplier Managed check box to specify if supplier-managed bins should also be included as a
source of supply for replenishment materials.

5. In the Part Filter field, indicate if you want to filter search results by part number, part class, or part group; depending on your
selection, specify the part class or product class, or use the Filter sheet to select the specific part numbers being filtered.

6. Click Retrieve to select and display part and inventory balance information for the specified warehouse, type and filtering
criteria.

7. To calculate the available supply inventory quantity for display in the Avail field, use the Select check box to indicate for which
rows you want to calculate the replenishment transactions. After you select the rows, click the Calculate Available button.

8. Enter the Move Qty for each selected transaction row. This value defines the quantity that will be replenished.

9. Click the Select All button to indicate move requests need to generate for all the current transaction rows.

10. To create move requests for the selected transaction rows, click the Generate Moves button.

Move Replenishments
Use the Moves sheet to review move requests generated or created for
The features on the Move sheet are similar to the
warehouses and bins. You first select the warehouse that will receive the
options on the Material Request Queue. This
material quantities, and then you specify type of move requests (Automatic,
program is available in the Advanced Material
Manual, or Managed) to review.
Management module.

518 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

To view replenishment move requests:

1. Navigate to the Moves

sheet.

2. Click the To 3 4
Warehouse drop- 1
down list to select
the warehouse for 2
which you want to
review move requests.

3. Use the Auto, Manual

and Managed check
boxes to select the type
of replenishment move
requests being retrieved.

4. Click Retrieve to retrieve

and display all
replenishment move 5 6 7 8
requests matching the
specified criteria.

5. To select specific
transaction rows for
processing, click the
Select check box on
each row.

6. Click the Select All button to process all the transaction rows on the grid.

7. Use the buttons at the bottom of the Moves sheet to assign employees and warehouse teams, set priority levels, and place
selected transactions on hold.

8. To view a report of the transactions, select one or multiple rows on the grid. Then click the Print button to generate the
Replenishment Moves report.

Serial Number Tools

If you use serial tracking for your parts, tools are available which help you leverage the serial number functionality. This section
describes two key tools – Serial Matching and the Serial Number Tracker.

Serial Matching
You use the Serial Matching program to link child serial numbers to parent serial numbers for a specific job or an individual serial
number. If a serial number is entered in the Top Serial sheet and it has a job number associated with it, this process operates in job
mode, restricting the serial number selection to available numbers on the selected job. However, if a job number does not exist for the
serial number, however, the process runs in serial number mode; you can match serial numbers with any available related numbers.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Serial Matching

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 519

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

To use serial matching:

1. Click the Job button to find

and select a specific job
10 11
number. You can also enter
the job number directly. If you
manually enter a job number, 12 1
this number is validated to
make sure it uses a serial 2
tracked part. Notice that if 3 6 8
you select a job and assembly
first, you can only use the 4 7
Serial Number Search to 9
5
locate serial numbers available
on the selected job.10 11

2. Click the Assembly button to

find and select the assembly
which contains the serial
number you want to match.
You can also enter the
assembly number directly.

3. The Part Number field

displays the part identifier for
the serial tracked part.

4. The Revision field displays

the revision level for the serial tracked part.

5. The Description field displays the concise explanation of the serial tracked part.

6. The Status field displays the current state of the serial tracked part. Some status examples include consumed, wip, and
inventory.

7. The Quantity field displays the quantity being consumed or manufactured on a selected job.

8. The Date Created field displays the date on which the current serial number was created.

9. If the Fully Matched check box is selected, it indicates all the child serial numbers are completely paired to a parent serial
number. This check box is available when you create a bill of materials for serial matching; select this check box to indicate the
parent serial number is fully paired.

10. Use the Matching Details sheet to manually match child serial numbers to parent serial numbers.

11. Use the Available to Match sheet to finalize matching child and parent serial numbers while within Job mode.

12. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Serial Number Tracker

Use the Serial Number Tracker to review database information on a specific serial number. The information in this tracker is read-only,
so all users can leverage this tool to review serial number information.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Serial Number Tracker

520 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

To use this tracker:

1. Click the Serial Number

button to find and select the 10
7 8 9
serial number you need.

2. The Part and the Description

1
fields display the identifier
and name of the part being 2
serial tracked.

3. This section displays current

warehouse information. The 3
Status, the Bin location, and
the Serial Mask ID display.

4. The Receiving section

displays information about 4
the purchased part shipment.
The Supplier ID, the
Supplier Name, and the 5
Packaging Slip/Line number
display.

5. The Shipping section displays 6

information about the
shipments to customers. The
Sold To ID, the Ship To
Name, the Sold To Name,
and the Packing Slip/Line
number display.

6. The bottom section displays internal information about the serial tracked part. The Job/Assembly/Mtl, Non-Conformance ID,
DMR/Action, and other fields display in this section.

7. The Transactions sheet displays all the part transactions run against this serial tracked part. To display this information, you must
click the Retrieve button on this sheet.

8. The Lower Level Serials sheet displays all the child serial numbered parts used on lower level assemblies for manufacturing the
current parent serial number. To see these serial numbers, click the Retrieve button on this sheet.

9. The Where Used sheet displays all the records that currently use the serial number. To display this information, click the
Retrieve button on this sheet.

10. The One Time Ship To sheet displays the temporary one time ship to address (if any) entered for this serial number into the
Serial Number Maintenance > One Time Ship To sheet. Use this functionality when you need to ship serialized part quantities to
a unique location requested by the customer.

Cycle and Physical Counting

The Epicor application contains a full range of tools to help you conduct inventory counts. You can count all items every time you do a
physical inventory (full physical) count. You can also periodically count various items; this count is referred to as a cycle count.

Regardless of the count method you use, leverage this functionality to analyze variances, suggest recounts, and post the count results.
You can create and scan audit ID labels during the count so that you can easily recount or audit the results. You can also create virtual
tags by part, location, lot number, and serial number for all the items included in the count. Tags can also be voided as you need.

You use the counting functionality to automatically generate counts and schedule them whenever you need.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 521

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

ABC Code Hierarchy

You use ABC codes to classify your inventory and also control discrepancy tolerances. This functionality handles both cycle and physical
inventory counting. You can define overall tolerances for each ABC code, but then override these values on related records through an
increasingly specific hierarchy. As the records in this hierarchy grow more specific, the tolerance values on the specific record override
the values defined in the previous record. Use this hierarchy to strategically define the tolerances you need within specific areas of your
inventory.

The following list describes the ABC code hierarchy order:

1. ABC Codes – These records define the highest level in the parameter hierarchy.

2. Plant Configurations – You can define tolerance parameters for a specific plant through Plant Configuration Control. These
values override the tolerances defined within ABC codes.

3. Warehouses – You can define tolerances for a specific warehouse through Warehouse Maintenance. These values override the
tolerances defined within plant configurations.

4. Part-Plant Records – You assign parts directly to a specific plant within Part Maintenance. You can then define tolerances for
each part–plant record; these values override the tolerances defined within warehouses.

5. Part-Warehouse Records – You assign parts directly to a specific warehouse also within Part Maintenance. You can then define
tolerances for each part–warehouse record; these values override the tolerances defined within part-plant records.

The following sections describe the tolerance values available within each record of the hierarchy.

ABC Codes

You define the overall parameters used by an ABC code within ABC Code Maintenance. These values are always used by the company
unless overridden by another record that has more precedence within the hierarchy. The values you define within the ABC code are
then used to count the part quantities during either cycle or physical counting.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > ABC Code

To create a new ABC code:

1. Click New on the Standard

toolbar.
1
2. Enter the ABC Code value
you need.

3. Select the Exclude from 9

Cycle Count check box to
indicate that parts assigned to 2
this ABC code are not
included during a cycle count.

4. In the Stock Valuation 3

Percent field, enter the ABC
code to automatically assign 4
to a part–warehouse record. 5
This value is used by the
Calculate ABC Codes
program to rank the parts
6
based on both usage
percentage and monetary 7
value. This program calculates
the Total Value of the parts; 8
this amount can include items
like current usage, On-Hand
Quantity, and projected
usage. Parts that fall within
the percentage value you define in this field are assigned to this ABC code.

522 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

When the Calculate ABC Codes program runs, it determines the total stock valuation and then ranks parts by both percentage
of usage and monetary value. For example, if 80.0 is entered into this field for ABC Code A, the Calculate ABC Codes program
assigns Code A to inventory items that represent 80% of the value of the total inventory in this warehouse. If 95.0 is entered
into this field for ABC Code B, the Calculate ABC Codes program assigns Code B to inventory items that represent the next 15%
of the value of the total inventory in this warehouse. Enter 100.0 for ABC Code C to assign that code to inventory items that
represent the remaining 5% of the value of the total inventory in this warehouse.

5. Enter the Count Frequency value you need for this ABC code. A required field, use this value to indicate how often parts with
this ABC classification are counted on a daily basis. For example, if you count inventory items on the basis of ABC classification,
and Class A items require counting every 60 days, enter 60 into this field. When you select parts for counting in cycle processing,
the application selects all class A items that have not been counted within the last 60 days for counting.

6. Select the Calculate Percent check box to indicate you want the If any one of these tolerance values is exceeded, the
application to use the percentage entered in the Percent Tolerance part is automatically included on a count variance
field to control discrepancy tolerances in cycle or physical counts for this report. For example, the frozen quantity for Widget
ABC code. If you enter a zero percentage, you indicate that any A is 100. If the Percent Tolerance for this part is
percentage variance is considered out of tolerance. A percentage higher defined as 2% and the Quantity Tolerance is set to 5,
than zero indicates that a percentage difference between the count a count of 105 causes it to appear on a count
quantity and the frozen quantity, by more than this value, is considered variance report. Even though the 105 value is within
out of tolerance. If the quantity variance is below this Percent Tolerance, tolerance for the quantity, it is not within tolerance
however, it is not included on count variance reports. for the percentage.
7. Select the Calculate Quantity check box to indicate the value in the
Quantity Tolerance field is used to control quantity discrepancy tolerances in cycle or physical counts for this ABC code. If a
count variance for a part within this warehouse is within this quantity tolerance value, the part is not included on count variance
reports.

8. Select the Calculate Value check box to indicate the value amount in the Value Tolerance field is used to control value
discrepancy tolerances in cycle or physical counts for this ABC code. If a count variance calculated for the part in this warehouse
is within the monetary value tolerance, the part is not included on count variance reports.

9. When you finish, click Save.

Plants

You can define cycle and physical count values for a plant within Plant Configuration Control. You first indicate the cycle count
method you want the plant to use. You then select a specific ABC code and define the values you want to use for the specific ABC
code within the plant. The values you define in Plant Configuration Control override the values defined for the main ABC code record.

Main Menu Path: System Management > Company Maintenance > Plant Configuration Control

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 523

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

To define cycle and physical inventory counting for a specific plant:

1. On the Summary sheet, click

the Plant button to find and
select the plant you need to
configure. You can also enter
the plant record directly.

2. Navigate to the Modules > 1

Inventory Management >
Cycle Count > Detail sheet. 2

3. Select the Cycle Count 3

Selection Method used for
this plant. Available options: 4

• Repetitive – Divides 5
selected count items
equally among the number of count days in the month. All items that meet the selection criteria, regardless of the total
number of selected items, are included. As long as items are not removed from the list of those being counted, all items are
counted according to the specified cycle count frequency.

• Random – Uses an algorithm to randomly select the parts being counted based on the selection parameters defined for a
specific ABC code. Parts are selected randomly and then divided equally based on the number of count cycles available in each
month.

4. Click the Cycle Count Calendar button to find and select a production calendar. The cycle count frequency follows the work
days defined within the selected production calendar.

5. The Description text for the selected production calendar displays in this field.

6. You are now ready to

define how ABC codes 6
are used within this plant.
To do this, click the Down
Arrow next to the New
button; select New ABC
Code.

7. Click the ABC Code button

to find and select the ABC
code. You can also enter the 7
code directly.
8
8. Select the Exclude from
Cycle Count check box to 9
indicate parts containing this 10
ABC code can only be
counted during a physical
inventory and cannot be 11
included during cycle
counting within this plant. 12
The value you select in this 13
field overrides the Exclude
from Cycle Count value
selected on the main ABC
code record.

9. Select the Override Stock Valuation check box to indicate that you need to use a different Stock Valuation Percent for this
plant than what is defined within the main ABC code. Selecting this check box activates the Percent field; enter the percentage
you need in this field.

10. Select the Override Count Frequency check box to define a different count frequency for this plant than what is defined within
the main ABC code. If you select this check box, you activate the Count Frequency field. Enter the count interval you want
using a number of months value.

524 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

11. Select the Calculate Percent check box to indicate you want the application to use the percentage defined in the Percent
Tolerance field to control discrepancy tolerances in cycle or physical counts for this plant. If you enter a zero percentage, you
indicate any percentage variance is considered out of tolerance. A percentage higher than zero indicates a percentage difference
between the count quantity and the frozen quantity, by more than this value, is considered out of tolerance. However, if the
quantity variance is below this Percent Tolerance, it is not included on count variance reports.

12. Select the Calculate Quantity check box to indicate the value within the Quantity Tolerance field is used to control quantity
discrepancy tolerances in cycle or physical counts for this ABC code within the current plant. If a count variance for a part within
this plant is within this quantity tolerance value, the part is not included on count variance reports.

13. Select the Calculate Value check box to indicate the value amount within the Value Tolerance field is used to control value
discrepancy tolerances in cycle or physical counts for this ABC code within the current plant. If a count variance calculated for
the part in this plant is within the monetary value tolerance, the part is not included on count variance reports.

Warehouses

You use Warehouse Maintenance to define the cycle and physical inventory counting methods used with a selected warehouse. You
define these values on the sheets under the Cycle Count/Physical Inventory tab. The values you define in Warehouse Maintenance
override the values defined for the plant which contains the warehouse.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Warehouse

To define cycle and physical inventory counting for a specific warehouse:

1. On the Warehouse Detail sheet, click

the Warehouse button to find and
select the warehouse you need.

2. Navigate to the Cycle Count Detail

sheet to define the cycle count method 1
for the current warehouse. The options 2
you select on this sheet indicate how
continuous inventory counting occurs
3
within this warehouse.
4
3. Select the Cycle Count Method used
for this warehouse. Available options: 5
6
• Use Plant Setting – Uses the cycle
count method specified for the plant
within Plant Configuration Control.
For more information about this
option, review the previous Plants
section.

• Repetitive – Divides selected count

items equally among the number of
count days in the month. All items
that meet the selection criteria, regardless of the total number of selected items, are included. As long as items are not
removed from the list of those being counted, all items are counted according to the specified cycle interval.

• Random – Uses an algorithm to randomly select the parts being counted based on the selection parameters defined for a
specific ABC code. Parts are selected randomly and then divided equally based on the number of count cycles available in each
month.

4. Select the Exclude Inactive check box to indicate inactive parts are not included during either cycle or physical counting for the
current warehouse.

5. Select the Exclude Zero QOH check box to indicate parts with zero perpetual on-hand quantities in all bin locations are not
included during either cycle or physical counting for the current warehouse.

6. Select the Exclude Negative QOH check box to indicate parts with a negative perpetual on-hand quantity in all bin locations
are not included during either cycle or physical counting for the current warehouse.R

Y MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 12

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 525

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

7. You use the ABC Code sheet to 7

specify ABC code count intervals
and quantity/percent tolerances for the
current warehouse. To modify an
15
ABC code, click the Down
Arrow next to the New button; select
New ABC Code.

8. Click the ABC Code button to find and

select the ABC code you need. 8
9
9. Select the Exclude from Cycle Count
check box to indicate parts containing 10
this ABC code can only be counted
11
during physical inventory and cannot
be included during cycle counting
within this warehouse. The value you 12
select in this field overrides the Exclude
from Cycle Count option selected on 13
either the plant configuration or the 14
main ABC code record.

10. Select the Override Stock Valuation

check box to indicate a valuation percentage is used with this ABC code within the current warehouse. Selecting this check box
activates the Stock Valuation Percent field; enter the percentage you need in this field.

11. Select the Override Count Frequency check box to define a specific count frequency for this ABC code within this warehouse.
If you select this check box, you activate the Count Frequency field. Enter the count interval you want using a number of
months value.

12. Select the Calculate Percent check box to indicate you want the application to use the percentage defined in the Percent
Tolerance field to control discrepancy tolerances in cycle or physical counts for this warehouse. If you enter a zero percentage,
you indicate any percentage variance is considered out of tolerance. A percentage higher than zero indicates a percentage
difference between the count quantity and the frozen quantity, by more than this value, is considered out of tolerance. If the
quantity variance is below this Percent Tolerance, however, it is not included on count variance reports.

13. Select the Calculate Quantity check box to indicate the value in the Quantity Tolerance field is used to control quantity
discrepancy tolerances in cycle or physical counts for this ABC code within the current warehouse. If a count variance for a part
within this warehouse is within this quantity tolerance value, the part is not included on count variance reports.

14. Select the Calculate Value check box to indicate the amount in the Value Tolerance field is used to control value discrepancy
tolerances in cycle or physical counts for this ABC code within the current warehouse. If a count variance calculated for the part
in this warehouse is within the monetary value tolerance, the part is not included on count variance reports.

15. Continue to define the ABC code values you need for this warehouse. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Part – Plant Records

You use Part Maintenance to define the cycle and physical inventory counting methods used with a specific part within a plant. You
define these values on the sheets under the Cycle Count/Physical Inventory tab located under the Plants tab. The values you define in
these sheets override the values defined for the warehouse that stores the part.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Part

526 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

To define cycle and physical inventory counting for a specific part-plant record:

1. On the Part > Detail

sheet, click the 8
Warehouse button to find
and select the warehouse you
1
need.
3
2. On the Part > Plants >
Detail sheet, click the Plant
button to find and select the 4
2
part-plant record you need to
modify. 5
6
3. Navigate to the Cycle Count
sheet. 7

4. If you need, enter a Quantity

Adjustment Tolerance
value. This value defines the
threshold at which a quantity
discrepancy is posted as an
adjustment to inventory. The
default value is zero, which
indicates all quantity
adjustments are posted.

Typically, you use this value to control the count discrepancy of parts counted by weight on a scale. In this situation, count results
often vary based on humidity. If a difference exists between the frozen quantity and the counted quantity but fall within this
tolerance value, no inventory adjustment is created. The part is now assigned a status that indicates no quantity adjustments
were posted.

5. Select the Calculate Percent check box to indicate you want the application to use the percentage defined in the Percent
Tolerance field to control discrepancy tolerances in cycle or physical counts for this part-plant record. If you enter a zero
percentage, you indicate any percentage variance is considered out of tolerance. A percentage higher than zero indicates a
percentage difference between the count quantity and the frozen quantity, by more than this value, is considered out of
tolerance. If the quantity variance is below this Percent Tolerance, however, it is not included on count variance reports.

6. Select the Calculate Quantity check box to indicate the value in the Quantity Tolerance field is used to control quantity
discrepancy tolerances in cycle or physical counts for this part-plant record. If a count variance for a part within this plant’s
warehouses is within this quantity tolerance value, the part is not included on count variance reports.

7. Select the Calculate Value check box to indicate the amount in the Value Tolerance field is used to control value discrepancy
tolerances in cycle or physical counts for the current part-plant record. If a count variance for a part within this plant’s
warehouses is within this monetary tolerance value, the part is not included on count variance reports.

8. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

VENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAP

Part – Warehouse Records

You can also use Part Maintenance to define the cycle and physical inventory counting methods used with a specific warehouse which
stocks the current part. You define these values on the sheets under the Cycle Count/Physical Inventory tab located under the Plants -
Warehouses tab. The values you define in these sheets override the values defined for the part-plant record which contains the
warehouse.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Part

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 527

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

To define cycle and physical inventory for a specific warehouse on a part-plant record:

1. On the Part > Detail

sheet, click the Part 14
button to find and select
the part record you need to 1
modify.
3
2. On the Part > Plants >
Detail sheet, click the Plant 2
button to find and select the 4 7
part-plant record you need to
modify. 5 8
6 9
3. Navigate to the Warehouses
> Cycle Count sheet.

4. Select the Manual ABC Code

10
check box to indicate you
want to manually control the 11
ABC code for this part within 12
this warehouse. The Calculate
ABC Code program then 13
cannot automatically change
the ABC code for this
part–warehouse record. For
more information on this program, review the Calculate ABC Codes section later in this chapter.

5. If the Manual ABC Code check box is selected, the ABC Code button activates. Click this button to find and select the ABC
Code you want to manually control.

6. If the Manual ABC Code check box is clear (not selected), the Min ABC button activates. Click this button to find and select the
first ABC Code you want automatically controlled for this part-warehouse record through the Calculate ABC Codes program.
This code and all other subsequent ABC codes are automatically calculated by this process.

7. Select the Override Frequency check box to define a different count frequency for this part-warehouse record than what is
defined within the main ABC code or the plant configuration record.

8. If you select the Override Frequency check box, you activate the Count Frequency field. Enter the count interval you want for
this part-warehouse record; use a numeric value that reflects a number of months.

9. The Last Cycle Count field displays the most recent date a cycle count was run against the parts stocked within this warehouse.

10. If you want this part-warehouse to use a threshold value for generating inventory quantity adjustments, select the Calculate Qty
Adj check box. This activates the Quantity Adjustment Tolerance field; enter a value that defines the threshold at which a
quantity discrepancy is posted as an adjustment to inventory. The default value is zero, which indicates all quantity adjustments
are posted.

11. Select the Calculate Percent check box to indicate you want the application to use the percentage defined in the Percent
Tolerance field to control discrepancy tolerances in cycle or physical counts for this part-warehouse record. If you enter a zero
percentage, you indicate any percentage variance is considered out of tolerance. A percentage higher than zero indicates a
percentage difference between the count quantity and the frozen quantity, by more than this value, is considered out of
tolerance. However, if the quantity variance is below this Percent Tolerance, it is not included on count variance reports.10

12. Select the Calculate Quantity check box to indicate the value in the Quantity Tolerance field is used to control quantity
discrepancy tolerances in cycle or physical counts for this part-warehouse record. If a count variance for a part within this
warehouse is within this quantity tolerance value, the part is not included on count variance reports.

13. Select the Calculate Value check box to indicate the amount in the Value Tolerance field is used to control value discrepancy
tolerances in cycle or physical counts for the current part-warehouse record. If a count variance calculated for the part in this
warehouse is within the monetary value tolerance, the part is not included on count variance reports.

14. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

528 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

Calculate ABC Codes

You use the Calculate ABC Code process to automatically run stock valuation Because this program is a process, you can
calculations, produce a report that displays suggested ABC code assignments, and assign it to a schedule. The process then runs
optionally assign ABC codes to part records in the warehouses linked to selected automatically each time the application
plants. You normally run this process before you process cycle and physical launches the schedule. For more information,
inventory counts. If you do not use cycle counting for inventory count processing, review the Automatic Scheduling section in the
you do not need to run this process. Epicor ERP Implementation Guide reference.
Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General
Operations > Calculate ABC Codes

To run this process:

1. Click the Historical Usage From drop-

down list to find and select the date
from which historical usage for this part 9
evaluates.

2. Select the Include Projected Usage 8

check box to indicate whether
estimated future usage of the part
should be included during the ABC 1
code calculation.
2
3. If the Include Projected Usage check
3
box is selected, the Projected Usage
Through field activates. Select the last 4 7
date on which the estimated future use
of the part is evaluated. 5 6

4. Select Include Current On-hand

check box to indicate the value of the
on-hand quantity for the part is included in the Total Value when calculating the Stock Valuation Percentage. You define the
Stock Valuation Percent value on each ABC code within ABC Code Maintenance; for more information, review the previous
section.

5. Select the Update ABC Codes check box to indicate all ABC codes are refreshed within the database. If you clear this check
box, the ABC codes are still calculated, but they print on reports as proposed, instead of final, values.

6. Select the Warehouse stock valuation % option to calculate the Stock Valuation Percent values against the Total Value of
the parts in the warehouse; this amount can include items like current usage, On-Hand Quantity, and projected usage.7

7. Select the Plant stock valuation % option to calculate the Stock Valuation Percent values against the Total Value of the
parts in the plant; this amount can include items like usage, On-Hand Quantity, and projected usage. You define this value on
each ABC code within ABC Code Maintenance.

8. Use the Filter sheet to limit the process to only calculate ABC codes within a specific plant.

9. When you are ready to run the process, click the Submit button on the Standard toolbar. The report that results is sorted first
by plant and then by warehouse. It displays the options you selected within the process program.

Initialize Last Cycle Count Date

You run the Initialize Last Cycle Count Date process to automatically define last cycle count dates for all parts assigned to an ABC
code. The process assigns dates to all parts which do not have a last cycle count date.

Use the process when you are first implementing the cycle count functionality. You first define the ABC code hierarchy and then run
the Calculate ABC Code process. You then run the Initialize Last Cycle Count Date process.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Initialize Last Cycle Count Date

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 529

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

To run this process:

1. Verify the Schedule drop-

down list displays the Now
option. 3
2. If you want, click the Filter
tab to limit this process to
only generate Last Cycle 2
Count Date values for a
selected warehouse or
warehouses. 1

3. When you are ready, click

Submit on the Standard
toolbar.

Cycle Count Schedule Maintenance

Use Cycle Count Schedule Maintenance to both create and update cycle count schedules. This workflow includes selecting the parts
being cycle counted for a specific warehouse in a designated time period and year; the period and year is based on the selected
production calendar.

After specifying a cycle period, year, and production calendar, the program creates a default cycle schedule; the default cycle count
dates can then be modified as you need. The individual cycles within the master periodic schedule are independent of each other, but
multiple cycles can be conducted concurrently as necessary. After you modify the generated cycle count schedule as you need, select
the actual parts being counted by running the Perform Part Selection option from the Actions menu.

Before using this program, you must define cycle periods in the Cycle Count Period Definition program, and define count parameters
at the part/warehouse, warehouse, part/plant, plant configuration, and ABC code levels.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Cycle Count Schedule
Maintenance

530 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

Create New Cycle Count Schedule

To create a new schedule:

1. Click New on the Standard

toolbar. 1
2. Click the Warehouse drop-
down list to define the 12
specific warehouse you want
to schedule. Warehouses
2
available within the current
plant display on this list. 3
3. Click the Year drop-down list 4
to define the year during
5
which this count schedule is
6
run. This value must be either
the current or a future year.

4. Click the Cycle Period drop-

down list to define the
specific cycle period during 7
which this cycle schedule 8
runs.
9
5. The first and last date for the
10
selected period display
respectively within the Period 11
Start and Period End fields.
If you need, you can change
these values to different
dates.

6. Click the Calendar button to find and select the production calendar you use with this cycle count schedule.

7. Select the Exclude On Hold check box to indicate any parts currently designated as on hold are not included with the current
cycle count schedule.

8. Select the Exclude Inactive check box to indicate inactive parts are not included with the current cycle count schedule.

9. Select the Exclude Zero QOH check box to indicate parts with zero perpetual on-hand quantities in all bin locations are not
included with the current cycle count schedule.

10. Select the Exclude Negative QOH check box to indicate parts with a negative perpetual on-hand quantity in all bin locations
are not included with the current cycle count schedule.

11. Select the Exclude Parts Without Activity check box to indicate any parts which did not have activity since the last cycle count
are not included with the current cycle count schedule. This check box is available if the Random Cycle Count Method is
selected on either the warehouse or its plant configuration.

12. Click Save.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 531

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

Create New Cycle

The Cycles sheet displays the count cycles created for the current period/year schedule. You can only change the Cycle Date on this
sheet; the other values are calculated and maintained by the application.

To create a new cycle for the current cycle count schedule:

1. Click the Down Arrow next to the

New button; select New Cycle. 1

2. The Cycle Sequence field indicates 5 4

the number of the cycle within the
current schedule. 2 3

3. If you need, you can modify the Cycle

Date. You can select any date within
the current period and year of the cycle
schedule. Cycle Date values do not
need to be sequential with previous
cycles.

4. Use the ABC Qtys sheet to display the

number of parts selected for each ABC
code within the current schedule.

5. Continue to add the cycles you need.

When you finish, click Save on the
Standard toolbar.

6. When you are ready to select parts for 6

the current schedule, from the Actions
menu, select Perform Part Selection.
The parts selected for the current cycle
are included in this schedule. You can
now generate tags for these parts
within Country Entry; this program is
explored in a later section.
You should only run Perform Part
Selection close to the beginning of
the month within the schedule. This
ensures that the part selection is
accurate. You must run this process
to display cycles within Cycle
Count Maintenance.

532 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

Cycle Count Part Selection Update

You run the Cycle Count Part Selection Update process to add or remove parts from a specific cycle. You can also move parts to a
different cycle. If you remove all the parts from a cycle, the cycle itself is automatically cancelled from the cycle schedule.

Notice you cannot run this process after the count tags are generated for the cycle.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Cycle Count Part Selection
Update

To update parts within a count cycle:

1. Click the Cycle button to find and

select the cycle you want to 4
update.

2. The Warehouse, Cycle Period, Cycle

Number, and other fields display 1 2
information about the selected cycle.

3. The Parts Selected grid displays all the

current parts included within this cycle
record.
3
4. To add a part to this grid, click New on
the Standard toolbar. A new row
5
displays in the Part Selected grid; use
this row to select the part you want to
add.

5. To select an individual part within this

grid, choose its Selected check box. 6 9 7 8

6. If you want to delete the Selected parts

from the grid, click the Remove
Selected button.

7. You can select all of the parts on this grid by clicking the Select All button.

8. To clear all of the Selected check boxes on the grid, click the Deselect All button.

9. To move the selected parts into a different count cycle, click the Move Selected button.

10. The Cycle Part Selection Move Part

window displays.
10 11
11. All the current cycles display within the
Cycles grid.

12. Highlight the cycle into which you

want to move the selected parts.

13. Click OK.

12

13

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 533

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

14. The selected parts are moved

into the selected cycle.
15
When you return to the
Cycle Count Part Selection
Update window, the selected
parts no longer display in the
Parts Selected grid.

15. Continue to make the

changes you need. When you
finish, click Save on the
Standard toolbar. 14

Initialize Physical Inventory

Run the Initialize Physical Inventory process to select parts for a physical inventory count. You can run this program for all warehouses
or selected warehouses. After the process generates, each warehouse you select has its own warehouse count control record. This
record is defined as being for physical inventory and all the parts stocked in the warehouse are assigned to it. Each record also has a
single “cycle” scheduled from the Start Date you entered for the process.

Before you run this process, be sure to generate the Cycle Count Schedule report. Generate this report for all warehouses to
determine which warehouses have cycle count processes you need to close. It is recommended you close all cycle count processes
before you initialize physical inventory for all the warehouses at once.10 11

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Initialize Physical Inventory

To run this process:

1. Select the Start Date you

want for this process. Each
warehouse record you
generate is scheduled from 4
this Start Date value.

2. Select the Include Zero QOH 3

check box to indicate you
want to include parts which
currently have a zero Quantity 1
On-Hand value. These parts
are added to the warehouse 2
count control record.

3. Click the Filter tab to select

one warehouse or a range of
warehouses.

4. When you are ready, click

Submit on the Standard
toolbar.

534 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

Count Cycle Maintenance

You use Count Cycle Maintenance to process both count cycles and physical inventory cycles. Once the cycles are created and the
parts are assigned to each cycle, use this program to generate tags, print tags, void tags, and other tag functions.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Count Cycle Maintenance

To use this program:

1. Click the Cycle button to find

and select the count cycles or
physical inventory cycles you
need.
1
2. Information about the
selected cycle displays. The 2 5
Warehouse field indicates 3
the specific warehouse inside 6
which the count is to be 4
done.

3. The Year and Cycle Period

fields indicate the period/year
for the current cycle record.

4. The Cycle Number field

displays the number identifier
for the cycle.

5. The Cycle Date field displays

the current date. This value
indicates the day during
which the cycle is run.

6. The Cycle Status field indicates whether the cycle is scheduled.

7. You are now ready to run the

tag functionality. To do 8
7
this, click the Actions
menu. 9

8. Notice several commands are 10

11
available. Select Generate 12
Tags to create the count tags 13
for a specific cycle within a 14
warehouse. This program 15 16
generates the tag numbers
for all parts assigned to the 17 18
cycle. Before you can run this
program, either the Part 19 21
Selection Process (found
20
within Cycle Count
Schedule Maintenance) or
the Initialize Physical
Inventory process must be run.

9. Select Print Tags to print copies of the generated tags. The tags are printed in tag order number. When the tags are printed, this
window saves these default settings. They cannot be updated, so if you need to reprint the tags, the original settings are used
again.

10. Run Reprint Tags to reprint all or some selected tags which were previously printed. You can filter the tags to reprint by sheet or
by tag numbers.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 535

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

11. Select Void Tags by Part to void cycle count tags for a specific part. The process voids all tags for the selected part and indicates
the part is voided for this cycle. It then moves the part to the next scheduled cycle for the warehouse. This option is not available
for a physical inventory cycle.

12. Choose Void Blank Tags to void all unused, blank cycle tags or specific blank cycle count tags. Only blank tags that have an
Open status or are assigned to a part, but not completed or posted, can be voided.

13. When you select Start Count Sequence, you freeze the pre-count inventory quantities and part costs in preparation for the
physical count. You must generate the tags for this cycle before you run this process. This program sets the count status to
Started and records the date/time.

14. Launch Reverse Start Count to undo a start count sequence you generated. As long as the cycle count status has not
progressed beyond Started, you can use this command. It clears the frozen quantity and cost values from the tag records and
resets the cycle status back to Tags Generated.

15. Select Print Unreturned/Voided Tags Report to generate a tag report. Any current unreturned and voided tags display on this
report.

16. Run Count Variance Calculation/Report to generate this variance report. This report displays variances between the frozen On-
Hand Quantity and the quantity counted for items within a specific count cycle.

17. Select Generate Recount Tags to create new tags for parts selected as out of tolerance by the Count Variance Calculation
report.

18. Run Print Count Parts Not Posted Report to generate this count report. This report displays any parts for a specific cycle which
are not complete yet. It also identifies the possible reason so the user can correct the problem and post the count results.

19. Select Post Counts to record the count adjustments to inventory. The parts included in the post process are defined as complete
for the cycle. The transaction date defaults to the current date. A part is ready for posting when all of its open tags have count
data, it is processed by the variance report, and the final count of the part is either within tolerance or a Cycle Discrepancy
Reason (CDR) is entered for the part. You review CDRs later in this chapter.

20. Select Print Inventory Movement to print a report of inventory movements.

21. Select Cancel Physical Inventory to end the current physical inventory cycle.

Count Tag Entry

Use Count Tag Entry to record the results of the cycle or physical inventory count. To begin, you first select the cycle you want to use
for count entry. Only cycles that have started their count sequences are available, and you can only select tags open for the selected
cycle.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Count Tag Entry

536 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

To enter count tag results:

1. Click the Cycle button to

find and select the cycle 17 4
you need.

2. Information about the 1 2

selected cycle displays in
the Warehouse, Cycle
Period, Year, and other
related fields.
3 4
3. Click the Tag button to
find and select the specific
tag against which you are
5
entering the count results.

4. You can also use the

Navigation toolbar to 6
move through all the 7 9 10
available cycles.
8 12
5. Information about the
Part, the Bin, and the 11
Unit of Measure 13
displays.
14
6. If the part is lot tracked, its
Lot Number displays in this 16
field.

7. If the part is serial tracked,

its number displays within 15
the Serial Number field.

8. In the Counted Qty field,

enter the quantity which was counted.

9. Select the Returned check box to indicate this quantity was returned to inventory from another source, like the shop floor or a
returned shipment.

10. If you need, click the UOM Worksheet button to select a different unit of measure for the part quantity. Only valid UOMs can
be selected and saved to the count tag.

11. In the Counted By field, enter the initials of the person who counted the part quantity.

12. Enter the Counted Date and the Counted Time in their respective fields.

13. In the Note field, enter any additional information you want saved with the count tag.

14. The Activity grid displays the part quantity changes which occurred during the count cycle.

15. The Activity Before Count field display the part quantity total before the count cycle began.

16. The Related Tags grid displays any tags generated for the same part.

17. Continue to update the count tags you need. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Count Discrepancy Reason Code Entry

Use Count Discrepancy Reason Code Entry to enter the count discrepancy codes for parts which have count variances. Any inventory
adjustments for parts out of tolerance are not posted until a count discrepancy reason (CDR) is defined within this program.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Count Discrepancy Reason

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 537

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

To enter a CDR:

1. Click the Cycle button.

2. Information about the selected cycle

displays in the Warehouse, the Cycle
Period, the Year, and other fields. You 5 1
cannot edit this information.

3. The Parts Selected grid displays all the 2

parts included in the cycle count. Scroll
through the rows on this grid until you
find one that has its Reason Code 3
field activated. This part quantity has a
count discrepancy.

4. Click the drop-down list to select the 4

Reason Code which explains the
discrepancy.

5. Continue to define reason codes for

other parts which have a discrepancy.
When you finish, click Save on the
Standard toolbar.

You create reason codes within Reason Code

Maintenance. You indicate which reason codes are
count discrepancy reasons by selecting the CDR
check box on the new Reason Code record.

Cycle Count Tracker

Use the Cycle Count Tracker to view information related to scheduled cycle count or physical inventory count sequences. Many of the
sheets available in the Cycle Count Tracker are read-only versions of sheets that display in Cycle Count Schedule Maintenance.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Cycle Count Tracker

To use this tracker:

1. Click the Schedule button to find and

select the schedule you want to review.
11 12
2. The Warehouse field displays the
warehouse for which the count is
scheduled.
1 9 10 7
3. The Year and the Cycle Period fields 2 8
indicate when the count is scheduled
to be carried out. 3

4. The Period Start and the Period End 4

fields define the days on which the
5
count is active.

5. The Calendar field displays the

production calendar used for the 6
schedule.

6. The Exclude check boxes indicate

which parts are not included in the
count.

7. If the Full Physical check box is selected, this indicates the count is for a physical inventory count sequence.

538 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

8. If the Parts Selected check box is selected, this indicates the part selection process is run against the current cycle count
sequence.

9. The ABC Qtys sheet displays the number of parts selected for a cycle count. Physical inventory counts do not display on this
sheet because they include all parts in a warehouse, not just parts assigned to an ABC code.

10. The Cycles sheet displays more detailed information about the cycle counts and physical inventory counts scheduled for the
current period.

11. The Parts sheet displays cycle count information on each part for a currently selected cycle count.

12. The Tags sheet displays tag information for a currently selected cycle and part.

Reports
This section describes some key inventory reports you use to monitor inventory quantities. You can run these reports whenever you
need. You can also set up each report to generate and print through a recurring, automatic schedule. Review the Automatic Data
Processing chapter in the Epicor ERP Implementation Guide for information on how you link a report to a recurring schedule.

Stock Status Report

The Stock Status Report produces a list of the current quantities and extended costs of all parts in the part master file.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Reports > Stock Status

To generate this report:

1. Use the Selection sheet to choose the

specific parameters for this report.

2. Use the Filter Summary section

1
to filter the report by Warehouse
and/or Part Class.
3
3. Click Print on the Standard toolbar to
run the report.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 539

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

Material Transaction Detail

The Material Transaction Detail Report produces a list of all inventory This report includes corresponding legal numbers for
transactions created through receipt, issue, shipping, and adjustment part transactions. The legal number is a tracking
processing. number required by some countries.
Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Reports > Material Transaction Detail

To generate this report:

1. Use the Selection sheet to

choose the specific
parameters for this report.

2. Use the Filter Summary

1
section to filter the report
by Part, Warehouse, and/or 3
Transaction Type.

3. Click Print on the Standard

toolbar to run the report.

540 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 17

Part Cycle Count Status Report

The Part Cycle Count Status report either lists parts overdue for their cycle count or parts not counted since a user-specified date. This
report is especially useful if you use the Random method for cycle counting. Use it to decide whether to add or delete parts which
were selected through the Cycle Count Part Selection Process.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Reports > Part Cycle Count Status

To generate this report:

1. Use the Due Dates On or

Before field to select the
main date for the report. This
date defines the cutoff date
for the report; all parts
overdue or not counted by
this date are included on this
report. 4

2. Select the Overdue Parts

Only check box to limit this 1
report to only display parts
2
which are overdue. Parts
which are not yet counted do
not display on this report.
3
3. Use the Filter sheet to limit
this report to only display
parts for specific warehouses
and/or ABC codes.

4. Click Print on the Standard

toolbar to run the report.

Time Phased Material Requirements Report

The Time Phased Material Requirements report pulls together data from purchase orders, sales orders, and inventory records to project
future inventory balances. The report analyzes planned receipts and requirements for each selected part class and then provides the
results.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > Reports > Time Phased Mtl. Requirements

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 541

CHAPTER 17 | INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

Within the Report Options section, select the job details that you want to include on the report. Available options:

1. Part Types – Select the types

of parts you want to review.
You can print Purchased
parts, Manufactured parts,
or Both purchased and
manufactured parts.
11 12
2. Stock Types – Select the
types of stock items you want
to review. You can display
Stocked items, Non-Stocked 1
items, or Both stocked and
non-stocked items. 2
3. Ignore If not needed by – 3
This date field is available
when you select the 4
Exceptions Only check box. 5
Any parts with a Suggested
Order Date on or before the 6
date you enter here do not 7
display on this report.
8
4. Exceptions Only – Select this 9
check box to only display
parts whose inventory 10
quantities are either above or
below defined quantity levels.
This option activates the other
exception options on this
sheet.

5. Below Reorder – Select this

check box to indicate parts
whose projected on-hand
quantity is below the
suggested reorder quantity
print on the report.

6. Below Minimum – Select

this check box to indicate parts whose projected on-hand quantity falls below their Minimum Quantity values print on the
report. You define this value through Part Maintenance.

7. Below Safety – Select this check box to indicate parts whose on-hand quantity falls below their Safety values print on the
report. You define these values through Part Maintenance.

8. Below Zero – Select this check box to indicate parts whose on-hand quantity is projected to fall below zero print on the report.

9. Over Maximum – Select this check box to indicate parts whose on-hand quantity is projected to become higher than their
Maximum Quantity values print on the report. You define this value through Part Maintenance.

10. Suggestions have impact on balance – Select this check box to indicate purchasing and manufacturing suggestions print on
the report.

11. Filter Tabs – Use the filters to select which part classes print on the report. You can also limit the results to only display project
balances up to a specific date.

12. When you are ready to run this report, click Print on the Standard toolbar.

542 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

Chapter 18
Shipping and Receiving

You use the shipping and receiving processes to record incoming and outgoing part quantities. The Shipping and Receiving
module contains programs that perform transactions such as shipments against a sales order, subcontract parts sent to a
supplier, raw material received from a purchase order, received to a job, received into inventory, or inventory parts that fill a
sales order from stock.

You can ship parts from a job or from inventory. You can optionally ship part quantities using either base legal numbers or
modify these numbers to generate Serial Shipment Container Codes (SSCC). When you set up the format you want for either
legal numbers or SSCC numbers, these values automatically generate on your shipments. Use these numbers to track the
progress of your shipped items.

This module also contains functionality to combine shipments from one or more suppliers that can be shipped in one or more
containers. For your subcontract workflow, you can ship WIP parts directly from a job to a subcontract supplier. Later, you use
Receipt Entry to enter the receipt of all inventory materials, non-inventory materials, and subcontract parts.

Various pack out methods are available. Standard Pack Out is a method of shipping that uses a barcode scanner to record
and track the packing flow. Use Master Pack Shipment Entry to combine separate pack IDs (master packs) into one master
pack group to ship as one shipment. Phantom pack out functionality is available when you are using a manifest interface and
provides the ability to generate multiple carrier labels for a single pack ID.

To complete this functionality, you can use the Data Collection module to process different transactions in the application by
entering and updating records through a handheld device.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 543

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

Setup
This section describes the primary records you need to create for the Shipping and Receiving module. These programs are contained
within the Setup folder for this module; only the primary records are described here. Some areas within the next Operations section
may also document setup records if they are required for a specific workflow.

You may also need to set up some parameters within Company Configuration. Some modules have global settings you define through
this administration program. For more information, review application help for this module; the Configuration topic details the options
you define within Company Configuration. You can also review the Company Configuration chapter in the Epicor ERP Implementation
Guide.

Carrier Codes
Use Carrier Maintenance to set up the standard freight carriers your company uses. Once you have entered the carriers used by your
company, you can link these carriers to Ship Via codes on both customer and sales order records. On each carrier code, you can also
identify a Standard Alpha Carrier Code (SCAC). These codes identify transportation companies.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > Setup > Carrier

To add a carrier code:

1. Click New on the Standard

toolbar. 1
2. In the Carrier field, enter the
Carrier ID. 6
2 5
3. In the Description field, enter
a description for the carrier.

4. In the SCAC field, enter the 3

Standard Alpha Carrier Code
4
(SCAC). The SCAC is a unique
code, typically two to four
alphabetic letters used to
identify transportation
companies. These codes were
developed by the National
Motor Freight Traffic
Association to help the
transportation industry
computerize data and records.

5. Select the Active check box.

6. Click Save.

Ship Via
Use Ship Via Maintenance to identify the different methods you use to ship products to subcontractors or customers. These shipping
methods are called Ship Via Codes and are mandatory when you enter a sales order.

Main Menu Path: Sales Management > Order Management > Setup > Ship Via

544 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

To add a ship via:

1. Click the New button on the

Standard toolbar. 1
2. Enter a unique Code for the
Ship Via.
10
3. Enter a Description for this 2 7
shipping method. You use the
description to select a 3
shipping method on orders,
4
packing slips, and invoices.
The description also prints on 5
various documents, such as
packing slips. 6

4. Optionally, enter the Web 8

Description. This value is the
text for the ship via method 9
that displays in
Customer Connect.

5. If you need, enter an SCAC

code. This value defaults from
the Carrier Code, but can be
changed on the Ship Via
record.

6. Optionally, select the Carrier

you want from the drop-
down list.

7. You can define one Ship Via code as the System Default. Select this check box to indicate the current shipping method is the
default ship via for the company.

8. Enter the Intrastat Code for this method of transportation. When you post an invoice, the Intrastat ship via code you enter in
this field is included in the transaction details.

9. Optionally, enter the Tracking Website information.

10. When you finish, click Save.

Packaging Codes
Use Packaging Code Maintenance to set up packing methods for shipments. These methods define the dimensions of an item you will
ship. You can also use these codes to identify a unique Extension Digit for Serial Shipment Container Codes (SSCC) generation.
Extension Digits identify the type of package shipped. A default extension digit can be generated by the SSCC code, but you can
define a more specific extension digit value that matches the package type through this maintenance program.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > Setup > Packaging Code

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 545

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

To add a packaging code:

1. Click the New button on 1

the Standard toolbar.

2. Enter a Packaging Code

and Description. 6
3. Select the appropriate Unit of
Measure (UOM) code for the
2
package type.

4. Define the Length, Width 3

and Height for the package.

5. Enter the Extension Digit for

the package type. This value
overrides the default value
generated by the SSCC code 4
and is used as the first digit of
the SSCC code when you ship
this package type. In this
example, the Extension Digit
for Pallet is 0.

6. Click Save.
5

Supplier Shipment Classes

Use Supplier Shipment Class Maintenance to set up the characteristics of common containers you use to ship. This includes volume
and default cost information. You can then use the shipment container class when you add container shipments.

Main Menu Path: Material

Management > Shipping / 1
Receiving > Setup > Supplier
Shipment Class 11

1. Click the New button on the

Standard toolbar. 2
2. Enter a Shipment Class and 3
Description.
4
3. Use the Loading Port to
specify the port where the 5
goods are loaded on the 6
vessel. Use the Country
maintenance program to
create a new location; for 7
more information, review
application help.

4. The Discharge Port specifies

the first location where the
8
goods are unloaded.
9
5. Select the appropriate Ship
Via and FOB for the shipment
10
class.

546 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

6. In the Shipping Days field, enter the number of days it takes for the goods to arrive at its destination.

7. Enter the Carrier and Contact information.

8. Enter the Uplift percent. The value entered here specifies the percentage added to the shipment upon receipt, as part of landed
costs.

9. Optionally, enter the Volume and Weight of the container.

10. If you wish, enter the Number of Containers and the Number of Packages in the shipment. These fields are for informational
purposes only.

11. Click Save.

Work Station Maintenance

Use Work Station Maintenance to set up work stations. These work stations are also called packing stations and these records
establish the scale and manifest interface for each pack station.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > Setup > Work Station

1. In the Station ID field, enter

a unique identifier for this
work station.

2. In the Station Type field, 11

select Pack. 10

3. Enter a Description for the 1

work station.
2
4. Select the Warehouse and
3
Bin where the work station is
located. 4

5. Select the Weight Input 5

option to specify how you
want the weight determined. 6
Available options: 7
• Prompt for Weight 8

• Get Weight from Part 9

Configuration

• Get Weight from Scale

6. In the Manifest section, select the Enabled check box. This value is required in order to use the Tracking Details fields for
phantom packs in Customer Shipment Entry.

7. In the Web Service URL field, enter the web site for the Pack Out manifest information. In this example, no manifest system is
available for connection, so the Web Service URL is set to http://localhost.

8. The Manifest/Weight Capture Point specifies the basis by which the weight is acquired. Available options:

• Pack

• Master Pack

9. Specify the Weight and Size Units of Measure (UOM). These fields are used as the default UOM for the manifest weight and
size.

10. If the work station is connected to a printer or a scale, you can configure these connections on the Devices sheet.

11. Click Save.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 547

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

Operations
This section details the operations available in the Shipping and Receiving module. Each operation is described as a workflow to help
guide you through the process from start to finish. These programs are primarily found within the General Operations folder for this
module. If a unique setup record is required to run the operation, this record is also described in this section.

Ship Items to Customers

You can ship parts from a job or from inventory. When shipping from inventory, you first run the Scheduled Shipments report to
determine what shipments are scheduled for today’s date. Once you know the shipments to process, use the Sales Order Pick List and
complete the shipment.

Scheduled Shipments Report

The Scheduled Shipments Report lists all the outstanding order releases. It displays them in order by Due Date, Order Number, Order
Line, and Order Release.

Main Menu Path: Material Management >

Shipping / Receiving > Reports >
Scheduled Shipments

1. Select the appropriate parameters for the

report you wish to review or print. Report
options include a Due On or Before date
and an option to Include Plant to Plant 2
Shipments.

2. The Dynamic check box is used in

conjunction with the Due On or Before 1
field. When this check box is selected,
you select an option from the Due On or
Before drop-down list rather than
defining a specific date. This option
dynamically changes the date printed on
the report.

For example, if the Today option is

selected in the Due On or Before field,
the date is replaced each time the report
prints with today’s date.
4
Additional scheduling options for all
reports are available in the
application. These options enable
3
you to establish a dynamic recurring
schedule when running a specific
report. For example, list outstanding
order releases every Monday. You can
review this feature in the Automatic
Data Processing chapter of the Epicor
ERP Implementation Guide.
3. You can optionally limit the report results. By
default, all records are included unless you
define a specific range of records to display
on the Filter sheet. These fields indicate
whether all or just some customers and parts
print on the report.

4. Click Print on the Standard toolbar.

548 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

Sales Order Pick List Report

Once you have verified the parts are available to ship, use the Sales Order Pick List to assist with the picking and packing process.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > Reports > Sales Order Pick List

1. Select the appropriate parameters for the report

you wish to review or print. Use the From and
To fields to define a date range for the pick list.

2. Select the New Page Per Order check box to

cause the report to print separate orders on
different pages.

3. Select the Print Barcodes check box to display 1

barcodes on the pick list. 2
4. Select the Print Kit Components check box 3
to display sales kit component parts on the pick
list. 4

To learn more about Sales Kits, review

Chapter 5: Sales Order Processing.

5. Set a filter to indicate the records to include on

the report. Filters are available for orders and
parts on the Filter sheet.

6. Click Print on the Standard toolbar. 6

5
Inquiries in the application are available
that display a part’s on-hand quantity and
availability. These inquiry programs, called
Trackers or Dashboards, are reviewed in
Chapter 1: The Epicor Environment.

Ship Parts to a Customer

Once the parts have been picked, you use Customer Shipment Entry to enter customer shipments and update sales orders. You can
ship parts from inventory or directly from a job.

To do this, you create pack records. A pack record can contain one or more You receive warning messages if you attempt to
detail lines that define the shipping quantities sent out with each pack record. enter shipments for customers that are on credit
Because of this, you can ship multiple orders for the same customer or ship-to hold. For additional information on customer credit
location through the same pack record. When the pack record is ready to ship, checking, refer to Chapter 21: Customers and
it goes to a Staging Area where users group the items into logical shipment Accounts Receivable.
stages. As each stage is shipped, the user confirms the shipment was sent.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Customer Shipment Entry

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 549

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

To create a new customer shipment:

1. Click the New button on

the Standard toolbar. 1

2. Select the Header > Detail

sheet. From the Ship Via
drop-down list, select how
this pack record is shipped to
the customer.

3. In the Ship Date field, enter

the date on which this pack
record is shipped. By default,
the current date displays.
2 3

4. You are now ready to 4

add detail lines to the
pack record. Click the Down
Arrow next to the New 13
button; select New Line.
14
5. The Lines > Customer
Shipment Entry > Detail 5
sheet displays. Enter the
Order Number that you are 6
12
shipping. You can also search
for sales orders by clicking on
the Order Number button.

If you are shipping the

parts from a job, enter
the Job Number. You can 7
enter a job number
instead of a sales order 8
number. If you do not
know the job number, 10
click the Job Number 9
button to access the Job 11
Search window and
browse for the
desired job.

6. Click the Line/Rel button to

search for the line to ship.

7. If you are shipping From Inventory, enter the quantity to ship in Our Ship Qty field.

8. The Warehouse defaults to the primary warehouse, but this value can be changed if necessary. Enter the Bin from which you
are picking the items.

9. If you are shipping From Manufacturing, enter the quantity to ship within the Our Job Ship Quantity field.

10. Within the Job field, enter or find and select the specific job that is manufacturing the ship quantity.

11. If you need, define the Warehouse and the Bin that receives the manufactured items.

12. Notice if you have satisfied the detail line’s order quantity, the Shipped Complete check box is automatically selected.

13. If you are shipping a sales kit and you can ship individual component parts from it, click the Sales Kit Component Issue tab.
Use this sheet to select the specific compound parts and quantities that you ship with this pack record.

550 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

14. If your company ships to a distribution center instead of directly to a You can only ship component parts if the Must Ship
customer, you need to specify the final destination of the order. To do Kit Complete check box is clear on the parent part
this, click the Mark For tab and define the Mark For Customer and record. To learn more about this check box, review
Ship To Address. You can also enter One Time Mark For information, the Parent Part - Sales Parameters section within
if needed. This information defaults from the sales order, but you can Chapter 5: Sales Order Processing.
override these values on each customer shipment.

15. If you have the Package

Management license
enabled, you have the ability 15 17
to use the Pack Out sheet.
Use this sheet to select
multiple lines from different
sales orders and then package
them together onto a single
pack record. The Pack Out 16
functionality is discussed later
in this chapter.

16. Select the Summary sheet to

review the pack record.
Notice the customer listed on
the selected order displays
within the Ship To and Sold 19 18
To fields.

17. In the Stage drop-down list,

you can enter a new staging
area, or select an existing
stage for this pack record.

18. Review the detail lines within 21

the Shipment Lines grid.

19. To load the outstanding

quantity from the order release into the pack record’s detail lines, 20
click the Ship All button.
When selected on the Lines > Customer Shipment Entry >
Detail sheet, the Shipped Complete check box indicates that
all outstanding quantities on the order release is fulfilled. The
pack record is only considered fully shipped, however, when
the Shipped check box is selected on the Header sheet.

20. Click the Actions menu, and select Print to print the packaging
slips that will accompany the shipment.

21. To complete the shipping transaction, click Save.

Serial Shipment Container Codes

You can ship customer shipments and master packs using Serial Shipment Container Codes (SSCC). You use these codes to both
improve the speed and reduce the costs of shipments.

The SSCC code identifies specific information about cartons, pallets, The primary reason you use SSCC codes is to speed your
trailers, or other containers and electronically exchanges information products through the shipping and receiving process. The
about the current state of a shipment. You can track these shipments Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) Advance Ship Notice
throughout your supply chain flow using the SSCC code assigned to (ASN) can be used with SSCC codes. Users can then scan
the shipment. This data exchange and tracking process is an application and process products rapidly through distribution centers
of the GS1 System (originally called the EAN.UCC System). You use this and other receiving locations.
application to optionally define customer and package type specific SSCC
codes.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 551

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

The graphic below shows the basic structure of the SSCC code and where you define the segments in the application.

Serial Shipping Container Code

AI Extension Digit UCC/EAN Company Prefix Serial Reference Number Check Digit

(EAN) 00 N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18

(UCC) 00 N1 0 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18

• Extension Digit = This value is the default Extension Digit defined in Legal Number Maintenance. It is the first character of
the SSCC code. As described previously, this value is also defined in packaging codes; these values override the default value
assigned on the legal number.

• UCC/EAN Company Prefix = Contains the default Prefix value defined in Legal Number Maintenance. This value identifies
your company.

• Serial Reference Number = This value is the Start Sequence/End Sequence defined in Legal Number Maintenance. These
values define the specific number for the shipment.

• Check Digit = This value is calculated by the application to confirm the number generated is correct.

You first define the Document Types you wish to assign to legal numbers. You next set up the legal numbers you need to generate the
SSCC codes during shipment processing. You can use these codes on packing slips and master packs.

Document Types

Use Transaction Document Type Maintenance to define the document types assigned to legal numbers. A document type links a
system transaction to a unique legal number that generates when the transaction prints. When you use SSCC codes, you need to set
up a document type for packing slips or master packs, and then link them to legal numbers.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Transaction Document Type

1. Click the New button on

the Standard toolbar. 1
2. Enter a Document Type
code and Description. 5

3. Select the appropriate

System Transaction from
2
the drop-down list. In this
example, you select Packing 3
Slips.
4
4. If you want this transaction
type to be the system default,
select the Default for
System Transaction check box. This transaction type then defaults on all transactions, but you can change this value if you
need.

5. Click Save.

Legal Numbers

Legal numbers can be a base tracking value you attach to a shipment. They can also be set
You cannot switch a shipment to use
up to generate unique SSCC codes. Your shipments must either use the base legal number
an SSCC code later. If a shipment starts
or the generated SSCC codes. Use Legal Number Maintenance to set up legal numbers for
using a legal number, it uses this
packing slips or master packs. If you wish, you can then leverage this program to define the
number during the life of the shipment.
structure and number of digits your company uses for SSCC. When you finish defining the
legal numbers and add these SSCC generation parameters, you then apply these codes in
the Shipping / Receiving module.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Legal Number

552 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

To enter a legal number:

1. Click the Down arrow 1

next to the New button;
select New Legal Number.
2 3
2. Enter a Legal Number code.

3. Enter a Description for the

4
code.

4. Select the appropriate

Number Type for the SSCC 5
code. Valid options for SSCC 6
are Packing Slips and Master 7
Pack. In this example, Packing
Slips is selected. 8

5. Select the Generate SSCC

check box. This indicates you
wish to use SSCC codes with
this legal number. When
selected, the Default Prefix
field becomes available.

6. Enter the Default Prefix for

the code generation. Use this
field to enter your company’s
assigned GS1 or UCC prefix. The SSCC Company Prefix is an eight digit code used as part of the generated SSCC code.

7. If you want the SSCC code to appear on the invoice after it is created, select the Display Number After Generation
check box.

8. Enter the Extension Digit. This single digit acts as the You can also create and assign customer specific SSCC codes. To do
first character of the SSCC code and can also be used this, you create a unique legal number and document type for
to identify the type of package shipped in Packaging packing slips or master packs and then assign to a specific customer
Code Maintenance. If a packing code uses a different in Customer Maintenance. For more information on Customer
extension digit, however, this default value is Maintenance, read Chapter 21: Customers and Accounts Receivable.
overridden. For details, review the previous Packaging
Codes section.

9. Now define the serial 9

reference start and end
sequence. Click the Down
Arrow next to the New
button; select New Default
Sequence.

10. Enter the Start Sequence

and End Sequence numbers.
The application uses these
numbers to generate the
serial number portion of the
SSCC code.

10

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 553

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

11. You now must link the

document type you previously
created to the legal number.
Click the Document Type
tab.
11
12. Select the appropriate
Document Type from the
12
Available Document Type
list.

13. Click the Right Arrow

button to move the 14
document type to the
Assigned Document Type
list.

14. Click Save on the Standard

toolbar.

13

Customer Shipment with SSCC Generation

Now that you have set up a legal number to generate SSCC codes, you can begin using them on shipments. You generate unique
SSCC codes for shipments within Customer Shipment Entry.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Customer Shipment Entry
1. Click the Down Arrow 1
next to the New
button; select New Pack.

2. From the Document Type

drop-down list, select the
type linked to the SSCC legal 2
number. In this example, you
select packing slip.

3. Select the Header > Detail

sheet. From the Ship Via
drop-down list, select how
this pack record is shipped to 3 4
the customer.

4. In the Ship Date field, enter

the date on which this pack
record is shipped. By default,
the current date displays.
5
5. Select Pallet (PLT) in the
Packaging Type field.

554 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

6. You are now ready to

add detail lines to the 6 9
pack record. Click the Down
Arrow next to the New
button; select New Line.

7. The Lines > Customer

Shipment Entry > Detail 7
sheet displays. Enter the
Order Number for the sales 8
order you are shipping.

8. Enter the sales order line and

release number you are
shipping in the Line/Rel field.

9. Click Save.

10. Select the Summary sheet.

10

11. Now you are ready to 11

generate an SSCC code. Click
the Actions menu.

12. Highlight the Legal Number

submenu and select Assign
Legal Number.

12

13. A message displays with the

SSCC code generated for this
shipment. Click OK.

14. Notice the Legal Number field

also displays the assigned
SSCC code. 14

13

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 555

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

Combine Shipments
Use Container Landed Cost Entry to combine shipments of one or more suppliers. The combined shipment may then be shipped into
one or more containers. Landed costs (duties, indirect costs, and uplift percentages) are defined for each shipment and applied to the
part unit cost when received.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Container Landed Cost Entry

To create a combined shipment using landed costs:

1. Click the Down Arrow 1
next to the New button;
select New Shipment.

2. A Shipment ID number 4
displays on the Header >
Detail sheet. Enter your
shipment information,
including the Description,and
Shipment Class. 2

3. Enter your Volume and

Weight unit of measures.
4. Use the Indirect Costs sheet
to apply any miscellaneous
charges or credits to the
shipment, if necessary.

5. Click the Down Arrow 5

next to the New button;
select New Shipment Line
for each shipment you wish
to combine. 8

6. Search for or enter a

Purchase Order and select 6
the Lines you wish to
combine into the shipment.

7. Enter additional line detail

information, including the
Volume and Weight unit of
measure.

8. Continue to use the Actions

menu to add shipment lines
for each purchase order
release you wish to include
on the shipment.
7

556 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

9. When you finish,

navigate to the Landed
Costs sheet to enter
landed cost information 9
for the shipment. Landed
costs - including duties,
indirect costs, and uplift
costs - can be defined for 11
each shipment and are
applied to the part unit 10
cost when the shipment
is received.

10. Select a Disburse

Method, including
indirect cost method,
quantity, value, volume,
weight, and manual.

11. After entering your

values, click the
Disburse button.

12. Navigate to the 14

Header > Detail
sheet.

13. Click the Status drop- 12 13

down list and select
Shipped.

14. Click Save on the

Standard toolbar.

Ship Subcontract Items from a Job

Use Subcontractor Shipment Entry to ship WIP parts directly from a job to a subcontract supplier. For example, you send out parts to
be painted by your supplier.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Subcontractor Shipment Entry

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 557

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

To enter subcontract shipment:

1. Click New on the 1

Standard toolbar.

2. Enter or search for the 4

Supplier ID to whom you are
shipping the materials.

3. Select a Ship Via code.

2 3
4. Select the Lines sheet.

5. Click the Down Arrow

5 7
next to the New button;
select New Line.

6. Enter the Job number and

the Asm/Opr (assembly and
operation) from which the
subcontract WIP parts are
shipped. 6
7. Click Save.

8. To print the packing label or

packing list, click the Actions
menu and select Close.
8
9. Now click the Actions menu again and select Print.

10. Select the Pack List check box.

11. Click OK.

10

11

558 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

12. Enter your report details and based on

your desired results, click Print, Print
Preview or Generate Only.
12

You can also process miscellaneous

shipments with Miscellaneous
Shipment Entry. Users can ship
non-billable parts to customers
through this process; inventory
transactions for the shipment are
not created.

Miscellaneous Shipment
Use Miscellaneous Shipment Entry to process shipments for miscellaneous (non-billable) material. You can also use this program to
enter and print packs for the return of discrepant parts to a supplier from a Discrepant Material Report (DMR) record. For more
information on the Discrepant Material Report, review Chapter 16: Quality Assurance.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Miscellaneous Shipment Entry

1. Click the New button on 1

the Standard toolbar.
The Pack ID will remain
zero until you first save 6
the record.

2. Enter the Name of the

customer to whom the
shipment is being sent. You 2
can enter this name directly,
or click Name to access the
Ship To Search window and 3
browse for a customer ship to
or supplier purchase point to
whom the shipment is sent.
4
3. Enter the Address, City,
State, Postal Code, and
Country for the shipment.

4. Select the appropriate Ship

Via. 5

5. Select the package Type and

Classification for the
shipment.

6. Click Save.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 559

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

7. The Pack ID is assigned.

8. Click the Down Arrow 8

next to the New button;
select New Line.
12
9. On the Lines > Detail sheet,
enter the Part for this
miscellaneous shipment line. 9
This part does not have to be
from the Part master table. In
this example, the part 10
number is not from the part
master file. 11

10. Enter a Description for the

part number.
If a part number from the Part master is entered, it will not be
11. Enter the Quantity for the shipment line. invoiced, the entered line quantity will not be relieved from
inventory, and a Part transaction record will not be created.
12. Click Save.

13. Now click the Actions menu and select Print to print the Packing Label
and Pick List.

14. To close the shipment, click the Actions menu and select Close.

14

13

Standard Pack Out

Pack Out is a method of shipping that optionally uses a barcode scanner to record and track the packing flow. An example of a
standard pack out system is a typical grocery store checkout process, where items are scanned during the purchase phase and then
moved down the conveyor into the bagging area. This methodology provides a fast and accurate system of tracking carton contents
when using a bar code scanner or hand-held scanning device.

During the following example, you will ship a sales order using standard pack out functionality. In addition to the Standard Pack Out,
you can also process a Master Pack Shipment and a Phantom Pack Shipment. You use the Master Pack to combine separate pack IDs
into one master package group shipped as one shipment. A Phantom Pack is a pack whose contents are not defined at the part level;
for example, the ID, weight, and recipient for a case are important, but the contents are unimportant.

You use the Customer Shipment Entry > Pack Out sheet to create, pack, and unpack Pack IDs using a bar code scanner. The fields are
automatically enabled and disabled, so you can easily scan data in the fields and only minimally use your mouse.

560 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

Before you process a pack out shipment, you must first create a sales order. Review Chapter 5: Sales Order Processing for information
on using Sales Order Entry.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Customer Shipment Entry

1. Select the PackOut sheet.

2
2. Click the New button.

3. Enter or scan the Order

1
Number for which you want to
ship. 3
4. Select the Packaging Type
for the shipment.
4
5. In the Part field, enter or scan
in the part number for the
shipment. In this example, part
DCD-300-OR is entered.
5
6. Notice the Match Found icon
displays.

7. Enter the shipment quantity in

the Qty field. 7

8. To print the packing list and shipping labels, click the Actions
menu and select Print.

9. When you complete the shipment, click the Actions menu and
select Close.

10. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. 10

Master Pack Out

The Master Pack Out workflow contains functionality you leverage to combine several shipments into one large shipment. These large
shipments are called master packs. Utilize this functionality to improve the efficiency of your shipments, as you both reduce the
number of shipments and organize how part quantities reach your customers.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 561

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

Master Pack Shipment Entry

Use Master Pack Shipment Entry to combine separate pack IDs (master packs) into one master pack group to ship as one shipment.
You can select the shipment type for the master pack, but the pack is then restricted to only shipments of that type.

In addition, all pack IDs must have the same ship-to address as the first pack ID added to the group.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Master Pack Shipment Entry

To create a new master pack:

1. Click the Down Arrow 1

next to the New button;
select New Master Pack.

2. The Shipment Type defaults

to Sales Order.

3. In the Stage field, select 2 3

Staging Area 1.

4. Enter a Ship Via method for 4

the shipment.

5. If you want to define the type

of package used for the
shipment, select a packaging
Type. In this example, CRTN 6
(Carton) is selected. 5
6. The Length, Width, and
Height default from the
package type you select.

7. Now add separate packs 7

to the master pack. Click
the Down Arrow next to
the New button; select 9
New Pack.
8
8. On the Lines > Detail sheet,
enter the first Pack ID you
want to include in this master
pack.

9. Click Save.

562 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

10. To enter additional packs

to the master pack, click 10
the New button on the
12
Standard toolbar.

11. In this example, a second Pack 11

ID 140 is added to the master
pack.

12. Add each new pack ID and

click Save.

13. To print the master packing slip and labels, click the Actions menu and
select Print Pack.
13

14. Click the Print button to generate the packing slips

and labels.

14

Stage Ship Confirm

Use the Stage Ship Confirm program to confirm shipments of staged pack IDs or master packs. You can then filter these staged pack
IDs by stage number, shipping status, shipment type, and ship via method. Lastly, you can confirm the selected stage of each pack ID.

1. Click the Actions menu, and select Stage.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 563

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

2. The Stage Ship 2

Confirm window
displays.

3. Click the Search button on

the Navigation toolbar to
search for and select the 3
appropriate master pack ID.

4. The Stage Ship 4

Confirm Search window
displays various fields you can
use to filter the records. Since
you only have one master
pack record in this example,
you do not select any filters.

5. Select the master pack 5

record you wish to
confirm.

6. Click OK.
6
7

7. Click the Actions menu and select Ship Confirm.

8. The Stage Ship 8

Confirm window displays.

9. Notice the Ship Status check

box is selected and the Ship
Date is added to the Pack ID;
these values indicate the
shipment is confirmed.

564 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

Phantom Pack Out

Phantom pack out functionality provides the ability to ship all items on an order, or multiple orders, under a single pack ID. When you
create a pack ID, the number of cartons you need is determined. Any cartons with tracking numbers, size and weight, and freighted
costs are sent to the shipping manifest process. Required shipping labels are then generated for each physical box.

Phantom Pack out is particularly useful when you do not want or need to take the time to record the contents of each box as a
separate Pack ID. Use this feature to quickly complete shipments and generate shipping labels that will go to the same ship-to
location. Since the contents of each box in the shipment are not recorded, you cannot always use phantom pack out for international
shipments.

For a pack to be marked as a phantom pack, it must meet the following requirements:

• Work stations must be manifest enabled.

• The status of the pack must be Closed.

• It cannot be a master pack, or be assigned to a master pack.

• Contents of the entire Pack ID, and not each individual phantom pack, are moved to the manifest system.

To enable the manifest workstation on your client machine:

1. From the Main Menu, click the Options menu and select Change
Workstation.

2. Select the appropriate workstation from the list.

3. Click OK.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 565

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

Customer Shipment Entry

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Customer Shipment Entry

1. Click the New button on the

Standard toolbar. 1
2. Select the Header > Detail
sheet.

3. From the Ship Via drop-

2 5
down list, select how this
pack record is shipped to the
customer.

4. In the Ship Date field, enter

the date on which this pack
record is shipped. By default,
the current date displays. 3 4
5. Enter the Stage for the
shipment.

6. You are now ready to 6

add detail lines to the
pack record. Click the Down
Arrow next to the New
button; select New Line.

7. The Lines > Customer

Shipment Entry > Detail 7
sheet displays. Enter the
8
Order Number you are
shipping. You can also search
for sales orders by clicking on
the Order Number button.

8. Click the Line/Rel button to

search for the line to ship.

9. Continue adding additional

lines to the shipment as
required. In this example, two
sales orders are added to the
shipment. Each has one 9
line/release for part DSS-1010.

10. Click the Actions menu and select Close.

10

566 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

11. Select the Manifest Info >

Tracking Details sheet.

12. Select the Phantom Pack 11

check box.
12
13. Enter the Number of Cases 14
13
to Create.
15
14. If you select a Package Code,
the manifest will use the
16
default Length, Width and
Height defined for the
specified Package. If you do
not select a package code, you can manually enter the Length, Width, and Height after you create the cases.

15. Click the Create Cases button.

16. The case information generates in the grid. If you have not selected a default package code, you can enter the dimensions of the
cases in the grid.

17. If you have a scale configured for this workstation, you can
calculate the weight value for each case. To do this, click the
Actions menu and select Get Case Weight.

17

18. Click the Actions menu and select Print to print the packing slips
and shipping labels for the cases.

18

19. Click the Actions menu and select Stage.

19

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 567

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

20. The Status on the shipment

changes to Staged.
20

Stage Ship Confirm

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Stage Ship Confirm Entry

1. Click the Search button on

the Navigation toolbar to 1
search for and select the
appropriate Master Pack ID.

2. The Stage Ship Confirm

2
Search window displays
various fields you can use to
filter the records. In this
example, only one Master
Pack record was retrieved, so
you do not need to select any
filters. In some situations,
however, you may need to
filter the stages to find the
ones you need.

3. Select the master pack record

you wish to confirm and
click OK.

4. Click the Actions menu and select Ship Confirm.

5. Notice the Ship Status check

box is selected and the Ship
Date is added to the pack ID.
These values indicate the
shipment is confirmed.

568 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

Handheld Customer Shipment Entry

If you use the Data Collection module, you can process different transactions in the To learn more about the Packout and
application by entering and updating records through a handheld device. Leverage Handheld functionality, refer to the Epicor
the handheld version of Customer Shipment Entry to scan or enter packing slip ERP Packout and Handheld courses.
information.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Data Collection > Handheld > Shipping & Receiving > Customer Shipments

1. Enter or scan the Order number for the shipment.

1
2. Either click the Process button or press <F2> on the keyboard to continue.

3. The customer shipment line item information displays.

4. Either click the Edit button or press <F3> if you need to update the packing line
item information.

5. In the Edit Packing Line window, enter any changes to the shipment, such as
quantity, warehouse, and bin information.
5
6. Either click the Ship Complete button or press <F6> to ship the line item
complete.

7. If you have updated the shipment quantity, either click Save or press <F2>.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 569

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

8. Either click the Print button or press <F6> to print the packing slip or labels.

9. In the Print Packing Slip window, either click the Print button or press <F2>.

10. In the Customer Shipment window, either click the Ship button or press <F2>.

10

570 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

Receive Materials
Receipt Entry is used to enter the receipt of all inventory materials, non-inventory materials, Receipts of parts returned by the
and subcontract parts. customer are handled through the
Receipt line items are either Purchase Order Receipts (recorded against a purchase order – RMA Processing program. This process
described next) or Miscellaneous Receipts (material received not associated with a purchase is discussed in Chapter 19: Customer
order). Receipt information updates the purchase order, if there is one, and creates Returns.
transactions to update inventory or job quantities and costs.

You can also receive parts to inspection in this program. If you do, you need to use Inspection Processing found in the Quality
Assurance module to complete this process. For more information on this process, review Chapter 16: Quality Assurance.

Receive Materials Directly to a Job

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Receipt Entry

1. Enter the purchase order

number that you are receiving
in the PO field.
1 2
2. Enter your supplier’s packing
slip identification number in
the Packing Slip field.

3. The application displays the

Arrived Lines for this receipt.
Purchase order line items
display as arrived until they 3
have been received for the
packing slip specified.

4. Select the Received All check

box to receive all the lines in
the Arrived Lines grid. Notice
the icon changes from
Arrived to All Received
when the lines are received. 4

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 571

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

5. On the Job Material > Detail

sheet, notice this purchase
order was originally set up
directly to a job. The job
number, assembly, and 5
operation numbers
automatically display, and the
material is shown as being
issued to the job complete.
These parts still need to be
delivered physically to the job
in process or to the work in
process staging area.

6. Select the Inspection

Required check box to
indicate the parts specified on
this receipt must be inspected
when they arrive at your 6
location. If this check box is
selected on either the part
class or supplier record
involved with the receipt, this
check box is automatically
selected and cannot be
changed.

7. Click the Actions menu and select Print Tags. You can
print one tag for the entire receipt quantity, or a tag for
each container.

8. To generate the tags, click Print on the Standard

toolbar.

572 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

Receive Materials from a Combined Shipment

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Container Receipt Entry

1. Enter the shipment number

that you are receiving in the
Shipment ID field.

2. The application displays the 1

Arrived Lines for this receipt.

3. To receive the line, on the 4

Stock > Detail sheet,
select the Line Received
check box. Notice the icon
changes from Arrived to 3
Received when the line is
received.

4. Click Save on the Standard

toolbar.

Drop Shipments
Drop shipping is a supply chain management technique in which the seller does not keep goods in stock, but instead transfers
customer orders and shipment details to a third party (such as a manufacturer or wholesaler), who then ships the goods directly to the
customer. The seller makes their profit on the difference between the wholesale and retail price.

Drop shipments are directly shipped by your suppliers to your customers. These goods are never physically received into or shipped
from your physical inventory because your supplier directly ships the goods. Because of this, the application prevents drop shipment
transactions from being processed using the standard receiving or shipment programs.

You use Drop Shipment Entry to mark a drop shipped sales order release as shipped and mark the linked PO release as received. Once
the drop shipment transaction is selected as received/shipped in Drop Shipment Entry, you can create a customer invoice for the drop
shipped item using AR Invoice Entry, and enter a supplier invoice received for the purchased item into AP Invoice Entry. You do this in
the same way as you process invoices for regular customer shipments and received purchases. Read Chapter 21: Customers and
Accounts Receivable for more information on AR Invoicing and Chapter 22: Suppliers and Accounts Payable for information on AP
Invoicing.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Drop Shipment Entry

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 573

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

To add a drop shipment entry:

1. Click the Down Arrow 1

next to the New button;
select New Drop Shipment.
2
2. In the PO field, enter the PO
number that you plan to drop
ship to your customer. You 3
can also click the PO button
to search for and select your 5 4
purchase order.

3. In the Packing Slip field, 6 7 8 9

specify the packing slip
identifier for the drop 10
shipment entry. The
application uses this to create 11
a shipment record for drop
ship sales orders, and a
receipt record for drop ship PO releases. When the sales order was entered, the Drop Ship check
box was selected indicating this order is being drop
4. Select the appropriate Ship Via.
shipped by your supplier to your customer. For more
5. The Customer Ship To information defaults in from the purchase information on sales order entry, read Chapter 5: Sales
order; if you need, however, you can change this value. Order Processing.

6. Click Mass Drop Shipment to process a mass drop shipment transaction for the selected pending PO and drop shipment lines.

7. Click Get All to select all pending PO and drop ship lines that have not yet been processed.

8. Click Clear All to remove all selected pending PO and drop ship lines not yet processed from this window.

9. Click Update to process and update the selected pending PO and drop shipment lines.

10. Use the Pending PO Lines sheet to view all pending drop shipment PO release lines for the purchase order number specified in
the PO field.

11. Double-click a specific pending PO Line record to process or edit a pending drop ship line.

12. The Drop Ship Lines > 13

Detail sheet displays the
first line as Complete.

13. Click Save. 14 12

14. The Tree View now displays

Drop Ship Lines (2) and
Pending PO Lines (1). Double-
click the second PO Line to
process the drop shipment for
this line.

574 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

15. The Drop Ship Lines > 16

Detail sheet displays the
second line as Complete.

16. Click Save. 15

17. Once the goods have been

hipped and received to your
customer, click the Summary 17
sheet and select the
Received/Shipped check box
to indicate the shipment can
be invoiced in Accounts
Receivable and Accounts
Payable.

Transfer Orders
Transfer orders are orders you create to move inventory from one plant to another. You use Transfer Order Entry to create the order to
move the part quantities, transfer the inventory from one plant, and then receive the inventory into another plant.

Transfer Order Entry

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Inventory Management > General Operations > Transfer Order Entry

To create a new transfer order:

1. Click the New button

on the Standard 1
toolbar.

2. The To Plant defaults from

the plant you are currently
logged in to. In this example,
you are logged in to the Main 2
Plant.
3
3. Select the From Plant. This
value is the plant from which 4
you are transferring the
inventory.

4. Select the appropriate Ship

Via code.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 575

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

5. Click Save.
5
6. The Transfer Order
Number is assigned.

7. Click the Down Arrow 7

next to the New button;
select New Line.

8. On the Line > Detail 12

sheet, enter the Part
Number for the transfer
order. 8
9. Enter the Quantity. 9

10. Enter a Need By and Ship

10
By date.

11. Select the Shipping

Warehouse and Shipping 11
Bin locations.

12. Click Save.

If you are using Material Requirements Planning (MRP), you can use
the Transfer Order Workbench to work with transfer order
suggestions that were created by the Process MRP program. For
more information on MRP, review Chapter 13: Material
Requirements Planning.

Transfer Order Shipment Entry

Use Transfer Order Shipment Entry to enter the shipment of an inter-plant transfer. If your plant record is set up for direct shipping,
you can also use the Direct Shipment functionality to ship parts to another plant without using an existing transfer order.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Transfer Order Shipment Entry

576 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

1. Click the New button to 1

create a new Pack ID for
the shipment.
5
2. Select a Ship Via for the
shipment.

3. Optionally enter the Tracking

Number and Weight.

4. Select the appropriate

Package Type and Package
Classification.

5. Click Save. 2

6. Click the Down Arrow 6

next to the New button;
select New Line.

7. On the Lines > Detail 11

sheet, select or enter the
Transfer Order Number for
the shipment.
7
8. Select the transfer order Line. 8
9. Enter the shipment Quantity.
9
10. You can optionally change the 10
default Warehouse and Bin
from which the inventory is
being shipped.

11. Click Save.

12. On the Summary sheet,

select the Shipped check box
to complete the shipment.

12

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 577

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

13. If your plant is configured to allow shipments without a transfer order,

you can use the Direct Shipment option. This option is found on the
Actions menu.

13

Receive Transfer Order

Use Receive Transfer Order to process a receipt of a transfer order shipment. In order to receive the transfer order shipment, you must
first change plants to the plant receiving the goods.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Receive Transfer Order

To receive a transfer order:

1. In this example, you will receive the goods in the Rockford Plant. You select this
plant on the Tree View on the Main Menu. You can also use the Change
Plant button.

578 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

2. Click the Pack ID button to

search for and select the pack
ID for the transfer order
shipment.

3. In the Transfer Order Search

window, select the Pack ID 2
you are receiving.

4. Click OK.

5. Click the Actions menu and select Receive All.

6. Click Save. 6 5

7. The Received Lines sheet

now displays the completed
receipt.

Bill of Lading
A bill of lading is a shipping document carriers use to identify cargo. These documents can be created automatically from existing pack
IDs or they can be created manually. You use the Bill of Lading program to enter and update these records.

Main Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Bill of Lading Entry

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 579

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

1. Click the New button on 1

the Standard toolbar.

2. If you have a Pack ID or Master Pack ID already created, you can click the
Actions menu and select Link Pack / MP to default in the bill of lading
information. In this example, you create a manual bill of lading that is not
linked to a Pack ID or Master Pack record.
2
3. Use the Generate option to select the packs to include for creating bills of
lading. 3

4. In the ID... field, enter the

Customer/Supplier ID.

5. Select the appropriate Ship

To location.

4 5

580 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 SHIPPING AND RECEIVING | CHAPTER 18

6. Click the Down Arrow 6

next to the New button;
select New Line.
12
7. On the Summary > Lines
sheet, enter the Number of
Packages for the bill of
lading.

If you have a linked pack

ID, all of the bill of lading
line information defaults
from the pack record.
8. Select the appropriate
package Classification.

9. Select the Packaging Code.

10. Enter the Weight and

Weight Unit of Measure for
the line item.
7 8 9 10 11
11. The Rate specifies the
amount per package that you
pay to ship this line.

12. Click Save.

13. To print the bill of lading, click the Actions menu and select Print BOL
Form.

14

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 581

CHAPTER 18 | SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

582 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 CUSTOMER RETURNS | CHAPTER 19

Chapter 19
Customer Returns

You enter customer returns through Return Material Authorization (RMA) processing. The RMA record is the document used
to control the returned parts. It identifies the customer, items returned, notes about the returned items, and the status and
disposition of each item.

In general, a return goes through the following processes:

• Customer service creates an RMA.

• Receiving is given the items against the RMA.

• Inspection looks over the items and determines what should be done. For example, can the items be returned for
rework, scrapped, or returned to stock?

• If necessary, order processing is alerted to create a new requirement.

• Accounting is alerted to issue credit as needed.

Other modules interface with RMA processing - Quality Assurance, Enhanced Quality Assurance, General Ledger, and
Accounts Receivable. Depending on which modules you have licensed, additional processing options may be available.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 583

CHAPTER 19 | CUSTOMER RETURNS

Setup
You may need to set up some parameters within Company Configuration. Some modules have global settings you define through this
administration program. For more information, review application help for this module; the Configuration topic details the options you
define within Company Configuration. You can also review the Company Configuration chapter in the Epicor ERP Implementation
Guide.

Operations
This section details the operations available when processing return material authorizations. Each operation is described as a workflow
to help guide you through the process from start to finish. These programs are primarily found within the General Operations folder
for this module. If a unique setup record is required to run the operation, this record is also described in this section.

Return Material Authorization (RMA) Processing

RMA Processing is used to control and track the return of items from the customer. You enter information about the return quantity
and that information is passed along to different groups that need to take action - such as inspection, billing, and order processing.

The application does not automatically create credit or shipping transactions or rework jobs based on these returns. Return material
authorization processing just provides the communication vehicle to make sure the necessary actions are taken for customer returns.
Based on the reason for the return and the customer needs, you enter or change jobs, create credit transactions in Accounts
Receivable, or reship part quantities as you need.

Main Menu Path: Sales Management > Order Management > General Operations > RMA Processing

RMA Summary

You use the Return Material Authorization Summary sheet to enter return authorization heading information such as RMA number,
date, and customer. You also use this sheet to create a new return or to change an existing return.

To create a new RMA entry:

1. Click the New button.

1
2. The RMA number defaults
in as zero; however, the
9
application assigns the next
2 8
number to the RMA after you
save the entry.
3
3. Enter the date the RMA is 4
issued in the RMA Date field.
5
4. Enter the Customer ID for
6
the customer requesting the
return.

5. By default, the Primary Billing 7

Contact displays in the
Contact drop-down list. If
you need, you can select a
different contact from this list.

6. If alternate bill to locations

are available on this customer
record, you can select an alternate billing location from the Bill-To drop-down list. If no alternate bill-to locations are available,
the Same As Sold To option displays.

584 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 CUSTOMER RETURNS | CHAPTER 19

7. If known, you can enter a Debit Memo identifier as well.

8. If you want this RMA to automatically print using the Business Activity Management functionality, select the Auto-Print Ready
check box. The RMA will automatically print using the rules you defined for the Business Activity Management event. For more
information on this functionality, review application help or the Epicor ICE Tools User Guide.

9. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

2
RMA Line

Once the RMA header is defined, you can then add detail lines to the RMA. RMA lines are added on the Details sheet.

To add RMA lines:

1. Click the Down Arrow 1

next to the New button;
select New Line.

2. You can now enter line 9

information on the Detail
sheet. In the Order/Line/Rel
field, enter the sales order
and line reference for this
return. You can enter this
number directly, or, you can
2 7
click the Order/Line button
to find and select it. 3 8

You do not have to 4 5

reference a sales order, but
if you do reference one, it
must be a valid order for
the customer specified on
the header of the RMA. 6

3. Enter the Part number and

Revision for the part being returned. You can also click the Part/Rev button to access search to find and select the part
number. The part does not have to exist in your part master file; however, if you entered a sales order and line reference in the
Order/Line/Rel field, the part and revision from the sales order display as the default.

4. Select the Reason why the customer is returning the material. Reason codes are defined in Reason Code
Maintenance. For more information,
5. The Ship To Contact ID group box populates with the information from a linked
review the topics for this program
sales order. If you need, you can change this contact information.
within application help.
6. Click the Serial Numbers button to find and select the serial numbers for the part
quantity being returned.

7. Enter the Quantity of the part being returned.

8. This RMA detail line is active, so you keep the Open check box selected.

9. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Print RMA 1

When you finish entering RMA lines, you are ready to print the RMA.

To print RMAs:

1. Click the Actions menu.

2. Select Print RMA Form. 2

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 585

CHAPTER 19 | CUSTOMER RETURNS

3. The RMA Processing – 3

RMA Form window
displays.

4. Click Print on the Standard

toolbar.

Receive an RMA

You handle RMA receipts within RMA Processing. The receipt details track the returned part receipts and the status of each return.

To initiate a receipt of items on an RMA:

1. Click the Down Arrow 1

next to the New button;
select New Receipt.

2. The Receipts > Detail sheet 12

displays. The current date
displays in the Date field, but
if you need, you can change
this value.

3. The Part Number from the

2 5 6
RMA detail line displays.
3
4. You enter the Quantity
returned through this receipt. 4
This value can be whole or in
7
decimals, depending on if
decimal places are available 8
with the selected unit of
9
measure code.
11 10
5. The Unit of Measure drop-
down list displays all the unit
of measure codes available for the current company. Select the unit of measure code that best reflects the unit through which
the quantity was returned.

6. Select the Request Move check box to indicate this returned material quantity must be moved to another location. This check
box is available if you use the Advanced Material Management module.

7. Review the This Receipt value to see the quantity defined for the selected RMA detail line. The unit of measure code for the
RMA detail line quantity also displays. You cannot change these values.

8. The Warehouse drop-down list defines the warehouse into which you are receiving this returned part quantity.

9. The Bin field defines the bin into which you are receiving the returned part quantity. If You can receive the items into an
you do not know the bin, click the Bin button to find and select it. Inspection location if the Quality
Assurance module is licensed.
10. Use the Lot field to specify the lot of the part quantity being returned. If you track lots for
the selected part, you must enter a lot for it. If you do not know the lot reference, click
the Lot button to find and select the lot record. You activate lot functionality for a specific part record within Part Maintenance.

586 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 CUSTOMER RETURNS | CHAPTER 19

11. If you are receiving a part quantity that uses serial numbers, you must click the Serial Numbers button to find and select the
serial number for each returned part quantity.

12. To complete the transaction, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

13. You can optionally view all

receipts for an RMA by
selecting the Receipts > List
sheet.
13

Request a Credit for Returned Material

Once material has been received, a Credit Request can be initiated through RMA Processing. This record is only a request for credit.
The actual credit memo is generated though Invoice Entry; to do this, you use the Get RMA Credits command found under the
Actions menu.

1. Within RMA processing, 7

click the Summary tab,
and select the Credits tab.

2. Click the Add button to

initiate the request for credit.

3. A new line displays within the

RMA Credit Requests grid.

4. Click Update to finish the

credit transaction. 1

2 4

Refer to Chapter 21: Customers and Accounts

Receivable for additional information on creating
credit memos.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 587

CHAPTER 19 | CUSTOMER RETURNS

5. The AR Invoice Maintenance 5

window displays with credit
information that defaults from the
RMA. Because you entered a sales
order number on the RMA, the 6
application looks up the pricing from
the order referenced and applies that
information to the credit memo.

6. Click Save on the Standard toolbar

and close AR Invoice Maintenance.

7. Within RMA Processing, click Save.

This process generates a request for credit

that is either approved or denied by your
accounts receivable department through AR
Invoice Entry. The RMA number is
referenced on the invoice (credit
memo) when it is posted.

RMA Disposition
Once RMA materials are received into an inspection location, you must disposition For information on DMR Processing, refer to this
them. The inspector reviews the RMA receipts and determines whether to section within Chapter 16: Quality Assurance.
disposition the material quantity back to inventory, to a job (for repair), or reject it.

If the Quality Assurance module is implemented, an RMA disposition typically occurs using Inspection Processing from this module. The
disposition process is very similar, except failed items flow into DMR Processing (Discrepant Material Report). If you are not using the
Quality Assurance module, then you must use RMA Disposition in the Order Management module.

Main Menu Path: Sales Management > Order Management > General Operations > RMA Dispositions

To disposition the material on an RMA:

1. Click Search on the Standard toolbar

to launch a search for RMA receipts.

2. Select the RMA to disposition and click

OK. 1

588 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 CUSTOMER RETURNS | CHAPTER 19

3. Click the New button.

3
4. Enter your disposition for the item
in the Dispose To field. In this 11 10
example, you are dispositioning the
item back to stock.

5. Enter the Quantity being

dispositioned. 6
6. The Unit of Measure drop-down list 4
displays all the unit of measure codes 5
available for the current company. 8
Select the unit of measure code that
best reflects the unit by which the 7
quantity was returned.

7. Indicate who inspected the returned

quantity by selecting this person from 9
the Inspected By drop-down list.

8. Select the Warehouse and Bin location which is receiving the returned part quantity.

9. If you are using the Enhanced Quality Assurance module, the Inspection For more information on how to enter inspection
Data button is available. Click this button to enter inspection results for results and other programs in the Enhanced Quality
RMA materials. Assurance module, review Chapter 16:
10. Optionally, enter any comments related to the disposition on the Quality Assurance.
Comment sheet.

11. Click Save.

Reports
This section describes a key report you use to monitor open return material authorizations. You can run this report whenever you
need. You can also set up this report to generate and print through a recurring, automatic schedule. Review the Automatic Data
Processing chapter in the Epicor ERP Implementation Guide for information on how you link a report to a recurring schedule.

Open RMA Report

The Open RMA report lists information for all RMAs that have an Open status. The information on this report includes the date and
number of the RMA, the customer address, the part’s line item information, and the reason for its return.

Main Menu Path: Sales Management > Order Management > Reports > Open RMA

1. In the Report Options section, enter a

From Date and To Date.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 589

CHAPTER 19 | CUSTOMER RETURNS

2. You can optionally apply a filter based

on specific customers and/or parts on
the Filter > Customer sheet or
Filter > Part sheet respectively.
5
3. To apply a filter on a specific customer,
for example, click the Customer
button, and select a customer from the
search window that displays. 2
3
4. When you have selected the customers
you want displayed on the report, click
OK.

5. When you finish, click Print.

590 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 ASSET MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 20

Chapter 20
Asset Management

Use the Asset Management functionality to accurately process your company’s assets. Within the application, assets are
resources owned by a company that hold value and can be converted to cash. Leverage setup programs within the module to
create, organize, and define asset depreciation parameters. Various depreciation methods and conventions are available,
including user-defined formulas that calculate depreciation through a method specifically targeted to your business and legal
requirements.

With the Fixed Asset Mass Changes program, you can efficiently modify characteristics for a group of assets. Three key
programs are available to help you record activities relating to your assets – Asset Addition Entry, Asset Disposal Entry, and
Asset Impairment Entry. Each activity is a separate transaction type.

The Asset Management module supports multi-currency for asset addition transactions. Asset purchases are recorded in the
transactional currency of the Accounts Payable invoice, in addition to the company and reporting currencies. The company
currency is used for miscellaneous and transfer additions from inventory.

After you enter and post asset activities, view activity details in the Asset Tracker. The Asset Tracker displays transactions and
the associated cost and status summaries. Using this information, your company can accurately calculate and report asset
costs.

Finally, Asset Management provides tools for financial reporting. The Asset Overview Report tracks the status of your fixed
assets and their depreciation, addition, disposal, and cost information. You can print physical labels for assets using the Asset
Labels Report. To report on depreciation for an asset during a fiscal year and period time range, view the Asset Depreciation
Report.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 591

CHAPTER 20 | ASSET MANAGEMENT

Setup
This section describes the primary records you need to create for the Asset Management module. These programs are contained within
the Setup folder for the module. Only the primary records are described here. Some areas within the next Operations section may also
document setup records if they are required for a specific workflow. For more information on setting up this module, review the
Company Configuration chapter in the Epicor ERP Implementation Guide.

Asset Register Maintenance

Use Asset Register Maintenance to create, edit, and delete asset registers. An asset register represents a financial view of an asset. A
financial view is defined by a group of parameters that control all valuations of the asset and when valuations are recognized.
Optionally, you can also link an asset register to a General Ledger book.

You create an asset register that contains parameters for depreciation conventions, depreciation methods, production units, estimated
life, asset calendar, and so on. Most parameters are specific to an asset and are defined as properties of the asset. Only one asset
calendar can be selected per asset register. All assets included in the register use the same asset calendar.

You should link an asset to at least one asset register, but each The GL book linked to an asset register is added to record all
asset may be linked to multiple registers. All activities controlled by asset activities. If an asset is included in multiple registers,
parameters (depreciation, disposal) and amounts that result from different depreciation parameters in the asset registers can affect
these activities are recorded, maintained, and reported per asset the values posted in depreciation and disposal transactions.
register.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > Setup > Asset Register

To create an asset register:

1. Click New on the Standard toolbar.

6
2. Enter the Asset Register identifier
you need. 1

3. Enter the Description for this asset

register. 2
4. If necessary, select the GL Book for this 3
register.

5. The fiscal Calendar defaults from the 4

selected book; if you need, you can
5
change this value.

For more information on how to set

up GL books and fiscal calendars,
review the General Ledger chapter
of the Epicor ERP Implementation
Guide.

6. Click Save.

592 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 ASSET MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 20

Asset Class Maintenance

Use Asset Class Maintenance to enter asset class records. You leverage asset classes when you want to group assets together on
reports to see assets divided by General Ledger divisions and departments. Asset classes are optional, but highly recommended. They
prevent the need to have a group code for all possible division/department and asset type combinations.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > Setup > Asset Class

To create an asset class:

1. Click New on the Standard

toolbar.
4
2. Enter the asset Class 1
identifier you need.

3. Enter a Description for this

asset class. 2
3
4. Click Save.

5. You are now ready to select the GL control type and code for the asset class. Click the Down
Arrow next to the New button; select New GL Control.

6. The GL Control > Detail

sheet displays. 8
7. Click the Type button to find
and select the GL Control
Type. Click the Control 6
button to find and select the
Control Code.

8. Click Save on the Standard

7
toolbar.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 593

CHAPTER 20 | ASSET MANAGEMENT

Asset Group Maintenance

Use Asset Group Maintenance to enter asset groups. You can select GL controls that define the accounts associated with the group.
The GL Controls are used for the journals to post depreciation, asset additions, asset disposals, and asset impairments. Examples of
group codes are plant and machinery, office equipment, motor vehicle leased, and motor vehicle owned.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > Setup > Asset Group

To create an asset group:

1. Click New on the Standard

toolbar. 4
2. Enter the asset Group 1
Code identifier.

3. Enter a Description for the

asset group. 2
3
4. Click Save.

5. You are now ready to select the GL control type and code for the asset group. Click the
Down Arrow next to the New button; select New GL Control.

6. The GL Control > Detail

sheet displays. 8
7. Click the Type button to find
and select the GL Control
Type. Click the Control
button to find and select the
6
Control Code.

8. Click Save on the Standard

toolbar. 7

594 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 ASSET MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 20

Spread Code Maintenance

Spread codes distribute asset depreciation costs per the days during which you want to charge depreciation. These codes define the
time period that serve as the basis for depreciation processing. Spread Codes can distribute values per fiscal years (Year Type) or per
fiscal periods (Period Type).

In a Period Type scenario, a company is closed two weeks in August and another two weeks in December. Fewer working days in
these months means less use of the assets, and because of this, less depreciation. The spread codes for these fiscal periods should
declare fewer days than spread codes for other fiscal periods. You can define the number of days per period that you want to charge
depreciation.

Use Spread Code Maintenance to establish spread codes and spread values for asset depreciation. Spread values can be created
manually or be automatically generated. From the Actions menu you can also import spread values from another file or export spread
values to a location outside of the Epicor application.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > Setup > Spread Code

To create a spread code and values:

1. Click New on the

Standard toolbar. 5
2. Enter the Code identifier 1
you need.

3. Enter a Description for the

2
spread code.
3
4. Select the Spread code Type
and Calendar from the drop- 4
down lists.

5. Click Save. You are now

ready to create spread code
values.

6. You create spread code values manually or automatically generate them. To manually create
a spread code, click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Spread Value.

7. In the Values grid, select the

fiscal information. In the
Value field, enter your spread 7
value. The value could be the
number of days, annual
charge, period charge, or any
value that is used to calculate
the fiscal period’s depreciation amount.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 595

CHAPTER 20 | ASSET MANAGEMENT

8. To automatically generate spread values, from the Actions

menu, select Generate.
8

9. The Generate Values window displays. 9

10. Click the Fiscal Year / Suffix button to find and select
the appropriate value. You can also enter the value 10
directly. The generated values are placed in the selected
fiscal year.

11. Now click the Assign Values drop-down list to define 11

how these values generate. The available options are Number
of Days, Prorate Amount, and Do not Assign. 12

12. If you want to remove any previous values for the 13

selected period, select the Override existing values check
box. You then generate completely new values for this period.

13. Click the Generate button to generate the spread values

based on the parameters selected.

14. In the Values grid, verify

the spread values were 15
generated.

Notice the spread value you

manually created for Fiscal
Period 1. This value was not
altered because the Override
existing values check box was
not selected when you
automatically generated
spread values.

15. Click Save.

14

596 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 ASSET MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 20

Depreciation Method Maintenance

Use Depreciation Method Maintenance to specify depreciation methods for assets. Several methods are available for you to calculate
depreciation. These methods are based on either the passage of time or the level of activity (or use) of the asset. If you need, you can
also define custom formulas to calculate depreciation.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > Setup > Depreciation Method

To enter a depreciation method:

1. Click New on the Standard

toolbar. 8
1
2. In the Method field, enter an
identifier for the depreciation method.

3. Enter a Description for the 2

depreciation method. 3
4. Click the Depreciation Charge Basis 4
drop-down list to select the charge to 5
expense or charge against revenue
basis in compensation for depreciation.
Available options:

• Annual - Calculates the depreciation

amount the asset receives for the
year and (either prorating equally or
using a spread code) distributes the
value per each period.
6
• Period - Calculates the depreciation
amount per each individual period. 7

Depending on the option you select, the Annual Charge or the Period Charge section activates.

5. Select the calculation you want from the Calculation Method drop-down list. The available options are:

• Rate Straight Line - This depreciation method uses an annual depreciation The formulas listed here are for Annual
charge basis. It calculates the annual charge using a percentage value. The methods. For Period methods, only the Use
period charge is calculated by prorating the annual charge equally (each period Fixed Value, the Use Spread Code, and the
receives an equal charge). User Formula methods are available
• Life Straight Line - This depreciation method uses an annual depreciation
charge basis. It calculates the annual charge using the estimated usability, or life span, of an asset. The period charge is
calculated by prorating the annual charge equally (each period receives an equal charge).

• Sum of Years Digits - This depreciation method uses an annual depreciation charge basis. The annual charge is calculated by
subtracting the Residual Value from the Asset Cost and multiplying this result against the Year Number divided by the Sum
Years digits. The year number represents the number of years remaining for depreciation. The sum of years digits represents
the total of all year numbers over which the asset is depreciated. The period charge is calculated by prorating the annual
charge equally (each period receives an equal charge).

• Declining Balance - This depreciation method uses an annual depreciation charge basis. The book value at the end of year
becomes the book value at the beginning of next year. The asset is depreciated until the book value equals the residual value.
The period charge is calculated by prorating the annual charge equally (each period receives an equal charge).

• Declining Balance to Straight Line - This depreciation method uses both the Declining Balance and Rate Straight-Line
methods. The Declining Balance method is used until the calculated amount generated through the Rate Straight-Line method
is more than the calculated amount generated through the Declining Balance method. When this happens, the Rate Straight-
Line method is used.

• Use Fixed Value - This method calculates either by year or by period, depending on the For more information, review
Depreciation Charge Basis you select. You set the fixed values within Asset Maintenance on the next Depreciation Method
the Register > Detail sheet. - User Formula section.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 597

CHAPTER 20 | ASSET MANAGEMENT

• Use Spread Code - This method calculates depreciation by using the spread codes selected on the asset record in Asset
Maintenance. You define these spread codes on the Register > Detail sheet.

• User Formula - You can define your own custom formula for depreciation.

6. An asset register can switch to an alternate depreciation method once and cannot switch back to the original method. Click the
Switch to Alternate Method drop-down list to define when this switch can occur. Available options are Never, On Greater
Expense, and On Book Value Reaching % of Asset Cost.

7. If you select either On Greater Expense or On Book Value Reaching % of Asset Cost, select which Method to which the
asset register will switch.

8. Click Save.

Depreciation Method – User Formula As an alternative, you can also select a pre-defined
formula, select the User Formula option, adjust the
To create a custom formula for the depreciation of an asset: formula, and save it as a new custom formula.
1. Click New on the Standard
toolbar.
1
2. In the Method field, enter an
identifier for your custom
depreciation method.
2
3. Enter a Description for the
depreciation method. 3

4. Click the Depreciation 4

Charge Basis drop-down list
to select the expense against
revenue basis in
compensation for depreciation. Available options:

• Annual - Calculates the depreciation amount the asset receives for the year and (either prorating equally or using a spread
code) distributes the value per each period.

• Period - Calculates the depreciation amount per each individual period.

Depending on the option you select, the Annual Charge or the Period Charge section activates.

5. From the Calculation

Method field, select User
Formula.

6. In the activated Charge

section, right-click the
Formula field, highlight
Formula Variables, and
select the parameters you
want for your formula. For
example, Estimated Life, Asset
Cost, Residual Value, 5
Depreciation Rate, and so on.
6

598 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 ASSET MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 20

7. In the activated Charge

section, right-click the 10
Formula field, highlight
Operators, and select the
math operator for your
formula. For example, +, -, *,
and so on.

8. When you finish selecting the

parameters, the custom
formula displays in the
Fomula field.
8
9. Click the Check Syntax 7
button. To the Syntax is 9
correct message that displays,
click OK.

10. Click Save.

Asset Maintenance
Use Asset Maintenance to enter and update records for fixed assets. You can organize assets by group, class, and project. You can also
import, export, and duplicate assets.

Specify an asset register for each asset. Identify the depreciation, cost information, annual charges, period charges, and prorate
options for the asset. Many depreciation methods are available. You can also establish parent/child relationships between assets. If you
would like, you can add a photo of the asset to the record.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > Setup > Asset

To create an asset:

1. Click New on the

Standard toolbar. 1

2. Enter the Asset Number

10 11
identifier.

3. Enter a Description for the 2

asset. 4
3
4. The status icon displays the 6
5
asset’s status. In this example, 7
the icon displays NEW. 8

5. Select the Asset Group for

the asset. 9
6. Click the Acquired drop-
down list to select the date
you gained the asset. The
date also displays in the
Placed in Service field.

7. If you need, click the Place in Service drop-down list to select a different date. This date serves as the first date of depreciation.

8. Optionally, select an Asset Class. Asset classes are valuable to group assets together for reporting purposes.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 599

CHAPTER 20 | ASSET MANAGEMENT

9. Optionally, enter cost amounts in the Residual (scrap value of the asset) or the Replacement (replacement value of the asset)
fields.

10. Click Save.

11. If you need, use the References, Parent / Child, and Additional sheets to define additional details of the asset record. Use the
Additional sheet to enter calibration, insurance, or lease information, or to add a photo of the asset.

Asset Maintenance - Register

You can link an asset to an asset register to control all valuations of the asset and also to control when valuations are recognized.

To link an asset register to the asset:

1. Click the Down Arrow

next to the New button; 1
select New Asset
Register. 6

2. Click the Register button to

find and select the asset
register.
2
3. Click the Method button to
find and select the 3
depreciation method to use
for the asset. 5
4
4. Select the depreciation
Convention you want to use
with this asset register. These
conventions define how the
depreciation amount for the
first year is adjusted. Available
conventions:

• Half-year - The asset was

placed in service at the
midpoint of the fiscal year.

• Mid-month - The asset was placed in service in the middle of the fiscal period.

• Quarter - Each quarter is one fourth the total number of periods.

• Mid-quarter - The asset was placed in service in the middle of the quarter. This convention is applicable for a year that has a
number of periods divisible by four and the quotient from this division is a whole non-zero number.

• Full-month - The asset was placed in service during the first half of the fiscal period and the application assumes it was
acquired at the beginning of the period; otherwise, the application assumes the first day of the next period.

• Entire-Month - The default option, this convention indicates that regardless of what day the asset was placed in service, a full
period’s depreciation is calculated against the asset.

• Next Month - Depreciation begins in the period after the asset was placed in service.

• Service Date - This convention is used to calculate depreciation for the first period. The days remaining in the period are
divided by the total days in the period to calculate the depreciation amount.

• Acquisition Date - The acquisition date is used to calculate depreciation for the first period. The days remaining in the period
are divided by the total days in the period to calculate the depreciation amount.

5. In the Useful Life field, enter the number of years or periods you estimate for the life of your asset.

6. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

600 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 ASSET MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 20

Asset Maintenance – Import

Use the Import option to import an external file to create asset or asset addition records. This functionality is useful if you have an
asset group from an external system that you wish to bring into the application. The file you import must be a comma delimited file
(csv) and follow the import file template. Refer to the application help to view the template details.

To import an external csv file:

1. From the Actions menu, select Import.

2. The Import Asset Group

window displays. Click the
Input File Name button to find
and select the csv file you want
to import.

3. Click Import. The Import

Successful message displays.

If an error occurs during the 2 3

import process, a message
displays saying some of the
assets were not imported.
Refer to the error details
that display in the Error Log
field.

Asset Maintenance – Export

Use the Export command to export detailed asset records to an external file. The file you export is saved as a comma delimited file
(csv) and can be updated by using Excel.

To export an external csv file:

1. From the Actions menu, select Export.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 601

CHAPTER 20 | ASSET MANAGEMENT

2. The Export Asset Group window displays. Click

the Output File Name button to find and select
the directory where you want to add your file;
enter a file name.

3. Click OK. The Export Successful message 2

displays.
3

Asset Mass Changes

Use Asset Mass Changes to issue mass changes to asset records. You can change an asset’s main attributes, such as Asset Group or
Asset Class, as well as depreciation parameters for a group of assets. The mass update occurs only for values in the default register,
and other registers are not affected.

You can select the assets to modify and specify the values assigned to those assets. If a field is left empty within the program, the field
will not assign a value to selected assets. Because of this, you cannot assign an empty value to an asset using Asset Mass Changes.

If you change the Asset Class or Asset Group for an asset that has posted activities, you may need to create manual GL Journal entries
to move asset costs.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > Setup > Asset Mass Changes

To issue a mass change to a group of assets:

1. Select the Asset Status. The statuses

available are New, Active, Disposed,
and Inactive.

2. If you want to process all child assets

for the selected asset even if they
1
do not match the selection criteria,
select the Include Child Assets 2
check box.
3
3. Select a Schedule option for the
process. If you select a schedule other
than Now, this process can run through
a recurring schedule. For more
information, review the Automatic
Data Processing chapter in the Epicor ERP Implmentation Guide.

4. You are now ready to define specific

Filter criteria. You can filter by Asset,
Asset Group, or Asset Class.

5. Click the Assets button to find

and select an asset. 4
5

602 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 ASSET MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 20

6. To select fields for replacement,

navigate to the Field Selection sheet.

7. Click the Right Arrow button to move

fields to the Replace list.
6

8. To define replacement data, navigate

to the Replace sheet and enter 9
applicable replacement
information. The Annual Fix Charge
field is open for data entry because it 8
was the field you selected to replace.

9. Click the Generate Only button.

Operations
This section details the operations available within the Asset Management module. Each operation is described as a workflow to help
guide you through the process from start to finish. These programs are primarily found within the General Operations folder for this
module. If a unique setup record is required to run the operation, this record is also described in this section.

AP Invoice Entry
Use AP Invoice Entry to record the purchase of an asset. After you create an AP invoice For more information on creating an AP
entry group and an invoice, you can add asset lines. invoice, review Chapter 22: Suppliers and
Accounts Payable.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > General Operations > Invoice Entry

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 603

CHAPTER 20 | ASSET MANAGEMENT

To create an AP invoice group, invoice, and asset line:

1. Click New on the

3
Standard toolbar.
1
2. Enter a Group identifier
and an Apply Date.

3. Click Save.
2

4. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Invoice.

5. Click the Ref PO button

to find and select the 12
purchase order you used to
buy the asset.

6. Click the Supplier button to

find and select the company
from which you purchased 5
the asset.
6
7. In the Invoice field, enter a
number for the invoice.

8. Select the Invoice Date and 7

Apply Date. These values
11
define when the invoice was 8
created and the date on
which you want the asset to
be recorded.

9. Select the Terms for which 9

you purchased the asset.

10. If you purchased this asset 10

using a Letter of Credit with
your bank, click the Letter of
Credit button to find and
select this record.

11. Use fields in the Currency

section to select the currency through which you purchased the asset.

12. Click Save.

604 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 ASSET MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 20

13. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Asset Line.

13

14. Enter a Description for

the asset you purchased. 18

15. In the Supplier Quantity

field, enter the quantity of
the asset you purchased.

16. Enter the Unit Cost of the

asset.

17. If you need, enter a different

Ext. Amount for the asset.
This value defines the total
cost of the asset.

18. When you finish, click Save.

17
14 15

16

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 605

CHAPTER 20 | ASSET MANAGEMENT

Asset Addition Entry

Use Asset Addition Entry to enter cost or depreciation additions to assets. You can also add an asset addition from an AP invoice line
item. You can also add an asset addition from an AP invoice line item or use an asset addition to add grant value to an asset. When
you finish, indicate the asset addition as available to post.

An asset addition must not be entered earlier than the acquisition date of an asset.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > General Operations > Asset Addition Entry

To enter an asset addition:

1. Select the Asset Number for which

you want to enter the addition.

2. Details from the selected asset display

in the Description, Asset Group,
Asset Class, and other fields. 1

3. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button; select New Addition.

4. Select the Addition Type.

7
Depending on the Addition Type
you select, several fields activate.

5. Enter the Addition Cost and the 4

Grant Increase amounts.

6. When you finish, select the Ready To 6

Post check box. 5

7. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

8. You can use the Misc. Addition

section to transfer assets depreciated in
a sister company. When an addition is
entered, you can manually specify
accumulated depreciation for the
previous year and current year. These
values are specific to the asset register
and need to be specified per asset 8
register associated with the asset.
9
9. If you need, select the Inter-Group
check box for a Miscellaneous
addition type. The Misc. Addition grid populates all asset registers in which the asset is An inter-group addition is not
included. An inter-group addition brings in the cost and the accumulated depreciation for posted; it is used only to update the
previous and current years from an addition from another company into the system. asset master and make the asset
available for further depreciation.

606 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 ASSET MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 20

To enter an asset addition from an AP Invoice line item:

1. Select the Asset Number

for which you want to 3
enter the addition.

2. Details from the selected asset 1

display in the Description,
Asset Group, Asset Class,
and other fields.
2
3. Click the Down Arrow next
to the New button; select
New Addition.

4. Click the Addition Type

drop-down list and select
Purchase. A Purchase
addition uses the AP
interface. 12
4
5. Enter an Apply Date.
7
5
6. Enter the Addition Cost 11
amount. 6

7. Select the Acquisition check

box.

8. Click the Supplier button to

8
find and select the supplier of
this asset. 9
10
9. Click the Invoice button to
find and select the correct
invoice.

10. Enter the Line where the

asset was created.

11. When you finish, select the

Ready To Post check box.

12. Click Save on the Standard

toolbar.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 607

CHAPTER 20 | ASSET MANAGEMENT

Asset Depreciation Calculation

Use the Asset Depreciation Calculation program to calculate the depreciation of assets for the current year, current period, or for an
asset’s useful life. This program can be run as many times a month as you need. To get an accurate calculation, you must post
additions, impairments, and disposals before you run this program.

Through this calculation, depreciation charges are determined for all registers in which an asset is included. This calculation uses the
asset calendar linked to the register.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > General Operations > Asset Depreciation Calculation

To run the asset depreciation calculation:

1. Select the Calculate Option you need

with the asset. Available options:
Current Period, Current Year, and
Asset’s Useful Life.

2. Select the Include Child Assets check

box to include all assets linked to a
parent asset in the calculation.

3. Select the Include Assets Marked for 1

Automatic Recalculation check box
2
to add assets selected for recalculation
in the calculation. 3

4. Use the sheets on the Filter tab to

narrow processing by Asset Group,
Asset Class, Individual Asset, Asset
Register, or by Depreciation Method. 5
5. Click the Submit button to run the
process. View the depreciation results 4
in the Asset Tracker.

608 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 ASSET MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 20

Asset Disposal Entry

Use Asset Disposal Entry to enter cost or depreciation disposals to fixed assets. This program is useful for recording new asset disposal
activity, as well as adjusting, deleting, and viewing unposted asset disposal activities.

You can dispose an asset in full or partially. Before you can record a disposal of an asset that is not fully depreciated, you must
calculate the depreciation for the period when the asset is being disposed.

When a partial disposal is created, the system suggests the amount of accumulated depreciation to use in determining the net book
value of the partially disposed asset, organized by asset register. You can then adjust this amount manually, affecting the net book
value for both the disposal and the disposal gain or loss.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > General Operations > Asset Disposal Entry

To enter an asset disposal:

1. Select the Asset Number for

which you want to enter
3
the disposal.

2. The information for the asset

displays in the Description,
Asset Group, Asset Class, 1
and other fields.
2
3. Click the Down Arrow next
to the New button; select
New Disposal.

4. Select the Disposal Type.

Depending on the
9
disposal type you select,
various fields open for data
entry and selection. Available
options: 4
5 8
• Miscellaneous - Does not
use an interface to other 6
module to record a
miscellaneous disposal. 7

• Transfer - Uses the

Inventory interface to
record a transfer of the
asset to stock.

• Sale - Uses the AR

interface to record a sale of
an asset in the AR module.

5. Enter a Description for the

disposal.

6. Enter the Disposal Cost you

need. This value defines the cost added to the asset as a result of this disposal.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 609

CHAPTER 20 | ASSET MANAGEMENT

7. Enter the Proceeds value. This field defines the sales amount of the disposal.

8. Select the Ready To Post check box.

9. When you finish, click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Asset Impairment Entry

Use Asset Impairment Entry to enter impairments on a specific asset. An impaired asset is an asset whose market value fell below its
carrying amount and is not expected to recover; the asset’s market value is less than the book value of the asset. Future cash flows
generated from the asset are less than the net difference of the market value and the book value of the asset.

You must record the value of the asset in the books by debiting a loss account, and this loss account displays as an expense in the
income statement – crediting the respective asset account.

You can create asset impairments for assets not fully disposed with a status New or Active. By default, the impairment cost is entered
using the company’s base currency, which is the transactional currency for this transaction. Amounts in reporting currencies are derived
using conversions on the Apply Date; however, you can override these converted values manually. Any unposted impairment can be
adjusted or deleted.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > General Operations > Asset Impairment Entry

To enter an asset impairment:

1. Select the Asset Number for

which you want to enter the 3
impairment.

2. The information for the asset displays

in the Description, Asset Group, 1
Asset Class, and other fields.
2
3. Click the Down Arrow next to the
New button; select New Impairment.

4. Enter a Description for the

impairment. 5

5. Enter the Impairment Cost.

6. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

4 7
7. Select the Ready To Post check box to
indicate this impairment will be 6
included in the asset posting process;
click Save again.

610 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 ASSET MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 20

Asset Posting Process

Use Asset Posting Process to post asset activities. The posting transactions that generate are based on the fiscal period and year you
enter. This program can be run as many times as you need within a single period. This process posts the calculated depreciation for
each new calculated depreciation record. The posting program also posts the net change (if any) between what was previously posted
and what will now calculate.

To determine how the asset transactions are grouped in the GL Journal, select one of the following grouping options:

• Post Additions– All asset transactions that have the same Apply Date are posted using a single GL Journal.

• By Activity Type – All asset transactions of the same type are posted using a single GL Journal.

• By Activity Type and Apply Date – Each asset transaction is posted using a separate GL Journal.

To post an asset addition, the following conditions must be true:

• The asset must be active, and must be assigned to an asset group.

• The GL accounts of the assigned asset group must be valid. If you use an asset class, then the account combinations from the
class must be valid.

• The Ready to Post check box must be selected for the asset in Asset Addition Entry.

• The Addition Added Date must be in an open fiscal period.

If a disposal is selected and unposted depreciations are available for the same period, the application will post depreciation for that
asset as well, even if the depreciation was not specifically selected.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > General Operations > Asset Posting Process

To post asset activities:

1. Select the Starting Date and Ending

Date for the process. Typically, these
values define the current fiscal period.

2. Click the Group Activities drop-down

list to select how you want to organize
the asset activities. You can group
activities by Activity Type, Apply Date,
or both.

3. Select the Include Child Assets check

1
box to process child assets linked to
the asset or asset group.
2
4. Use the Asset Activities section to
3
select the type of activities you would
like to post. Available options:

• Post Additions - Posts all new

4
assets acquired during the
selected period.

• Post Disposals - Posts all assets you

are removing during the selected
period.

• Post Impairments - Posts all market

value asset changes that occurred
during the selected period.

• Post Depreciations - Post

depreciation entries calculated for the selected period.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 611

CHAPTER 20 | ASSET MANAGEMENT

5. Use the Filter > Asset Group and

Filter > Individual Assets sheets to
narrow posting by Asset Group or by
Individual Asset.

6. Click the Submit button on the 6

Standard toolbar. 5

Close Asset Period/Year

Use the Close Asset Period / Year program to close asset periods and years for a specified asset register. The Close Asset Period / Year
program is similar to the Close Fiscal Period / Year program found in the General Ledger module.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > General Operations > Close Asset Period / Year

To close asset periods and the year:

1. Select the Asset Register in which the

asset period is found.

612 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 ASSET MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 20

2. The associated Fiscal Calendar and

current year display. These values 4
are based on the current date and
on the start and end dates of the year.
If you need, you can enter a different
Fiscal Year/Suffix.

3. Select the Fixed Asset Closed Period 2

check box for all the periods you want
to close. You can only close periods
that do not have unposted asset
activities.
3
When you select this check box, the
application verifies no unposted activity
records are available for this period.
However, if unposted activities exist,
the application displays an error
message informing you unposted
activities are present, and you cannot
select this check box. The period
following the last closed period
becomes the current asset period.

4. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

5. Once all periods are closed in the selected year, you can close the
asset fiscal year. To do this, from the Actions menu, select Asset
Year End Process. 5
This process is required to designate the next fiscal year as the
current fiscal year. You need to run this process because most
of the values shown in the Asset Tracker display at the end of
the current fiscal year.

6. The Asset Year End Process window displays. Click

the Process button.

The Asset Year End Process summarizes all costs of the asset.

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 613

CHAPTER 20 | ASSET MANAGEMENT

Reports
This section describes some key reports you use to review asset transactions. You can run these reports whenever you need. You can
also set up each report to generate and print through a recurring automatic schedule. Review the Automatic Data Processing chapter
in the Epicor ERP Implementation Guide for information on how you link a report to a recurring schedule.

Asset Depreciation Report

Use the Asset Depreciation report to view depreciation for an asset register during a fiscal year and period time range. You can filter by
asset or asset group.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > Reports > Asset Depreciation

To set up and run this report:

1. Select the Asset Register you need.

2. Optionally, use the Fiscal Year and

From Period fields to enter the fiscal
year and period you want on the
report. By default, the fields display the 6
current period for the fiscal calendar 5
associated with the selected asset
register.
1
3. Select the Include Child Assets check 2
box to indicate all assets linked to a
parent asset display on the report.
3
4. To only display the main information
on the report, select the Print 4
Summary check box.

5. If you need, use the Filter sheet to

limit the report to individual assets or
asset groups.

6. Click Print on the Standard toolbar.

Asset Depreciation Forecast Report

Use the Asset Depreciation Forecast Report to view the full year depreciation value forecast. The forecast displays regardless of
whether depreciation has been posted or not.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > Reports > Asset Depreciation

614 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION

 ASSET MANAGEMENT | CHAPTER 20

To set up and run this report:

1. Enter the Start Year of the forecast

report.

2. Select how many Years you want

projected in the report. Five years is the
maximum.

3. Select the Asset Register you need.

4 5
4. If you need, use the Filter sheet to
limit the report to individual assets and 1
asset groups. 2
5. Click Print on the Standard toolbar. 3

Asset Labels Report

Use the Asset Labels report to print an asset label that includes the asset code, asset description, asset tag, and location details:

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > Reports > Asset Labels

To set up and run this report:

1. In the Status section, select the types

of assets you want to include in the
report by selecting the related check
boxes.

2. Select the Acquired From and the 4

Acquired To dates you need. Labels
3
will print for all assets added to your
data on or between these dates.
1
3. If you need, use the Filter sheet to
limit the report to individual assets,
asset groups, warehouses, or locations.

4. Click Print on the Standard toolbar.

2

EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION | 615

CHAPTER 20 | ASSET MANAGEMENT

Asset Overview Report

Use the Asset Overview report to view the status of your fixed assets including depreciation, activities, and cost information.

Main Menu Path: Financial Management > Asset Management > Reports > Asset Overview

To set up and run this report:

1. Select the Asset Register you need.

2. Select the Print Summary check box

to include only primary information on
the report.
8
3. Select the check boxes to print all
Additions, Impairments, and 7
Disposals that occurred for the
selected asset register. 1
2
4. Select the Print Costs check box to
include the costs of each asset
assigned to the selected asset register. 3

5. Select the Print Unposted

Depreciations and the Print 4
Depreciation Details check boxes to
include the depreciation information 5
you need.
6
6. To organize the report to print each
asset on a separate page, select the
Print one Asset per Page check box.

7. If you need, use the Filter sheet to

limit the report to individual assets and
asset groups.

8. Click Print on the Standard toolbar.

616 | EPICOR SOFTWARE CORPORATION